DreamGEAR ELITE VSX-94TXH User Manual

Page 1
Operating Instructions
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER
Page 2
CAUTION – TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT USE THIS (POLARIZED) PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION
CORD.
RECEPTACLE OR OTHER OUTLET UNLESS THE BLADES CAN BE FULLY INSERTED TO PREVENT
BLADE EXPOSURE.
ATTENTION
POUR PREVENIR LES CHOCS ELECTRIQUES, NE PAS UTILISER CETTE FICHE POLARISEE AVEC UN PROLONGATEUR, UNE PRISE DE COURANT, OU UNE AUTRE SORTIE DE COURANT, SAUF SI LES LAMES PEUVENT ETRE INSEREES A FOND SANS EN LAISSER AUCUNE PARTIE A DECOUVERT.
D2-4-4-1_EF
WARNING – TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK
HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
D1-4-2-1_En
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Product Name: AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER Model Number: VSX-94TXH, VSX-92TXH Responsible Party Name: PIONEER ELECTRONICS SERVICE, INC. Address: 1925 E. DOMINGUEZ ST. LONG BEACH, CA 90801-1760, U.S.A. Phone: 1-800-421-1404
PLEASE WRITE THIS SERIAL NUMBER ON YOUR ENCLOSED WARRANTY CARD AND KEEP IN A SECURE AREA. THIS IS FOR YOUR SECURITY.
D1-4-2-6-1_En
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. – Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. – Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. – Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
D8-10-1-2_En
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la Classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
D8-10-1-3_EF
Information to User
Alteration or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user’s right to operate the equipment.
D8-10-2_En
CAUTION: This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded cables and connectors are used to connect the
unit to other equipment. To prevent electromagnetic interference with electric appliances such as radios and televisions, use shielded cables and connectors for connections.
CAUTION
For U.S. and Australia Model
D8-10-3a_En
The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation).
C67-7-3_En
Page 3
IMPORTANT
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
The lightning flash with arrowhead, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric
CAUTION:
TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.
shock to persons.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
READ INSTRUCTIONS — All the safety and
operating instructions should be read before the product is operated.
RETAIN INSTRUCTIONS — The safety and
operating instructions should be retained for future reference.
HEED WARNINGS — All warnings on the product
and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.
FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS — All operating and use
instructions should be followed.
CLEANING — The product should be cleaned only
with a polishing cloth or a soft dry cloth. Never clean with furniture wax, benzine, insecticides or other volatile liquids since they may corrode the cabinet.
ATTACHMENTS — Do not use attachments not
recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
WATER AND MOISTURE — Do not use this
product near water — for example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like.
ACCESSORIES — Do not place this product on an
unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.
CART — A product and cart combination should be
moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn.
VENTILATION — Slots and openings in the cabinet
are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to.
POWER SOURCES — This product should be
operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company.
LOCATION – The appliance should be installed in a
stable location.
NONUSE PERIODS – The power cord of the
appliance should be unplugged from the outlet when left un-used for a long period of time.
GROUNDING OR POLARIZATION
• If this product is equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other), it will fit into the outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.
• If this product is equipped with a three-wire grounding type plug, a plug having a third (grounding) pin, it will only fit into a grounding type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug.
POWER-CORD PROTECTION — Power-supply
cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product.
OUTDOOR ANTENNA GROUNDING — If an
outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. See Figure A.
LIGHTNING — For added protection for this
product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges.
POWER LINES — An outside antenna system
should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal.
OVERLOADING — Do not overload wall outlets,
extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.
ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT
Fig. A
OBJECT AND LIQUID ENTRY — Never push
objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.
SERVICING — Do not attempt to service this
product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
DAMAGE REQUIRING SERVICE — Unplug this
product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions:
• When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged.
• If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product.
• If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
• If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation.
• If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way.
• When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance — this indicates a need for service.
REPLACEMENT PARTS — When replacement parts
are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards.
SAFETY CHECK — Upon completion of any service
or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition.
WALL OR CEILING MOUNTING — The product
should not be mounted to a wall or ceiling.
HEAT — The product should be situated away from
heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
GROUND CLAMP
GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250, PART H)
NEC — NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
D1-4-2-3_En
ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE
ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810-20)
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810-21)
Page 4
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.
Contents
01 Before you start
Checking what’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Ventilation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Installing the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Loading the batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
02 5 minute guide
Introduction to home theater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Listening to Surround Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Automatically setting up for surround sound
(MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup . . . . . 9
Playing a source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Better sound using Phase Control and
Full Band Phase Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Using Phase Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Using Full Band Phase Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
03 Connecting your equipment
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
When making cable connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
About the video converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Connecting your TV and DVD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Connecting your Blu-ray disc player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or
other set-top box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and
other video sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Using the component video jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connecting digital audio sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
About the WMA9 Pro decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Connecting analog audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Connecting a component to the front panel inputs
Installing your speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Connecting the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Placing the speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
THX speaker system setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Connecting antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
AM loop antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Connecting external antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Plugging in the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
AC outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
. . . 18
05 Listening to your system
Auto playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Standard surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Using the Home THX modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Using the Advanced surround effects . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Listening in stereo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Using Front Stage Surround Advance. . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Using Stream Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Selecting MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Choosing the input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Using surround back channel processing . . . . . . . . . 32
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode . . . . . . . . . . 32
Using the genre synchronizing function. . . . . . . . . . . 33
06 Using the tuner
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Improving FM stereo sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Using Neural THX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Tuning directly to a station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Saving station presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Naming station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
07 The System Setup menu
Making receiver settings from
the System Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Automatic MCACC (Expert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Surround back speaker setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Manual MCACC setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Fine Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Fine Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional. . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Full Band Phase Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Manual speaker setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Speaker Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
X-Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
THX Audio Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4
En
04 Controls and displays
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Operating range of remote control unit . . . . . . . . . . 24
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
08 Other connections
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Connecting your iPod to the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
iPod playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Watching photos and video content. . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Page 5
Using XM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Connecting your XM Radio receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Listening to XM Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Using XM HD Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Saving channel presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Using the XM Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Using SIRIUS Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Connecting your SIRIUS Connect Tuner. . . . . . . . . . 53
Listening to SIRIUS Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Saving channel presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Using the SIRIUS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
About HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs. . . . . . . . 56
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs . . . . . . . . 56
Speaker B setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Switching the speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Bi-amping your front speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Bi-wiring your speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Connecting additional amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
MULTI-ZONE listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Making MULTI-ZONE connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Connecting an IR receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Switching components on and off using
the 12 volt trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display. . . 62 Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer plasma display
. . . 63
Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output . . . . . 63
Advanced MCACC output using your PC . . . . . . . . . 64
09 HDMI Control
Making the HDMI Control connections. . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Setting the HDMI options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Setting the HDMI Control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Before using synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Synchronized amp mode operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Canceling synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
About HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
10 Other Settings
The Input Setup menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Input function default and possible settings . . . . . . 68
The Other Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Multi Channel Input Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
ZONE Audio Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays. . . . . . . . . . 69
OSD Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
11 Using other functions
Setting the Audio options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Setting the Video options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Making an audio or a video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Playing a different source when recording. . . . . . . . 73
Reducing the level of an analog signal . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Using the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Switching the speaker impedance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Checking your system settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Default system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
12 Controlling the rest of your system
Setting the remote to control other components. . . . 77
Selecting preset codes directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Programming signals from other remote controls Erasing one of the remote control button settings
. . . 77
. . . 78
Resetting the remote control presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Confirming preset codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Renaming input source names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Direct function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Multi Operation and System Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Programming a multi-operation or
a shutdown sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Using multi operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Using System off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Controls for TVs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Controls for other components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Operating other Pioneer components
with this unit’s sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
13 Additional information
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
No sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Other audio problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output. . . . . 86
Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
iPod messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
XM radio messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
SIRIUS radio messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Surround sound formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Dolby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional . . . . . . . . . . . 91
About THX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
About Neural Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Listening modes with different input signal formats Stream direct with different input signal formats . . . 96
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Cleaning the unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Our philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product or cords associated with accessories sold with the product will expose you to chemicals listed on proposition 65 known to the State of California and other governmental entities to cause cancer and birth defect or other reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling
This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period.
. . . 93
D36-P4_A_En
K041_En
En
5
Page 6
01
Before you start
Chapter 1:
Before you start
Checking what’s in the box
Please check that you’ve received the following supplied accessories:
• Setup microphone (cable: 5 m (16.4 ft.))
• Remote control unit
• AA/IEC R6P dry cell batteries x2
• AM loop antenna
•FM wire antenna
• iPod control cable
• Warranty card
• These operating instructions
• Operating instructions for HOME MEDIA GALLERY (VSX-94TXH only)
Ventilation
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat dispersal (at least 20 cm (8 in.) at the top). If not enough space is provided between the unit and walls or other equipment, heat will build up inside, interfering with performance and/or causing malfunctions.
20 cm
Receiver
Slot and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to protect the equipment from overheating. To prevent fire hazard, do not place anything directly on top of the unit, make sure the openings are never blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths and curtains), and do not operate the equipment on thick carpet or a bed.
(8 inches)
Installing the receiver
• When installing this unit, make sure to put it on a level and stable surface.
Don’t install it on the following places: – on a color TV (the screen may distort) – near a cassette deck (or close to a device that gives off a magnetic field). This may interfere with the sound. – in direct sunlight – in damp or wet areas – in extremely hot or cold areas – in places where there is vibration or other movement – in places that are very dusty – in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as a kitchen)
Loading the batteries
Caution
Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions:
• Never use new and old batteries together.
• Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries properly according to the marks in the battery case.
• Batteries with the same shape may have different voltages. Do not use different batteries together.
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or area.
6
En
Page 7
5 minute guide
Chapter 2:
5 minute guide
Introduction to home theater
Home theater refers to the use of multiple audio tracks to create a surround sound effect, making you feel like you're in the middle of the action or concert. The surround sound you get from a home theater system depends not only on your speaker setup, but also on the source and the sound settings of the receiver.
This receiver will automatically decode multichannel Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround sources according to your speaker setup. In most cases, you won’t have to make changes for realistic surround sound, but other possibilities (like listening to a CD with multichannel surround sound) are explained in Listening to your system on page 28.
Listening to Surround Sound
This receiver was designed with the easiest possible setup in mind, so with the following quick setup guide, you should have your system hooked up for surround sound in no time at all. In most cases, you can simply leave the receiver in the default settings.
• Be sure to complete all connections before connecting this unit to an AC power source.
1 Connect your TV and DVD player.
See Connecting your TV and DVD player on page 14 to do this. For surround sound, you’ll want to hook up using a digital connection from the DVD player to the receiver.
2 Connect your speakers and place them for optimal surround sound.
Connect your speakers as shown in Installing your speaker system on page 19.
Where you place the speakers will have a big effect on the sound. Place your speakers as shown below for the best surround sound effect. Also see Placing the speakers on page 20 for more on this.
Fron t
Left (L)
Center (C)
Listening position
Surround Left (SL)
Fron t Right (R)
Subwoofer (SW)
Surround Back Left (SBL)
Surround Right (SR)
Surround Back Right (SBR)
3 Plug in the receiver and switch it on, followed by your DVD player, your subwoofer and the TV.
Plug the power cable into the AC outlet and switch on the receiver.
1
Make sure you’ve set the video input on your TV to this receiver. Check the manual that came with the TV if you don’t know how to do this.
• Set the subwoofer volume to a comfortable level.
4 Use the on-screen automatic MCACC setup to set up your system.
See Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) below for more on this.
5 Play a DVD, and adjust the volume to your liking.
Make sure that DVD/LD is showing in the receiver’s display, indicating that the DVD input is selected. If it isn’t, press DVD on the remote control to set the receiver to the DVD input.
In addition to the basic playback explained in Playing a source on page 9, there are several other sound options you can select. See Listening to your system on page 28 for more on this.
See also Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on page 36 for more setup options.
02
Note
1 After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 15-second HDMI initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any operations during this process. The HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks during this process, and you can turn on this receiver once it has stopped blinking. When you set the HDMI Control mode to OFF, you can skip this process. For details about the HDMI Control feature, see HDMI Control on page 65.
7
En
Page 8
02
5 minute guide
Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control)
The Auto MCACC Setup measures the acoustic characteristics of your listening area, taking into account ambient noise, speaker size and distance, and tests for both channel delay and channel level. After you have set up the microphone provided with your system, the receiver uses the information from a series of test tones to optimize the speaker settings and equalization for your particular room, and also to calibrate the frequency­phase characteristics of the speakers connected.
Make sure you do this before moving on to Playing a source on page 9.
Important
• Make sure the microphone and speakers are not moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.
• Before using the Auto MCACC Setup, the headphones should be disconnected and the iPod, HOME MEDIA GALLERY (VSX-94TXH only), XM or SIRIUS Radio function should not be selected as an input source.
Caution
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are output at high volume.
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
XM RADIO
HDMI
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
BD TV CTRL
SIRIUS
TUNER
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
DVD TV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER TOP MENU
BAND
SETUPSETUP
PROGRAM
CATEGORY
TV VOL
GUIDE
CLEAR +
10
TUNE
ST ST
ENTER
TUNE
TV CONTROL
INPUT
TV CH
SELECT
CH LEVEL
CLASS
ENTER
V PARAMETER MENU T.EDIT
RETURNRETURN
VOL
DISC
2 Connect the microphone to the
MCACC SETUP MIC
jack on the front panel.
Place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your normal listening position (use a tripod if possible). Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.
• Push down on the lower portion of the front panel door to access the MCACC SETUP MIC jack:
AUDIO VIDEO
PHONES
PARAMETER
(TUNE)
(ST) (ST)
ENTER
(TUNE)
SETUP
RETURN
TUNER EDITSPEAKERS BAND
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
MULTI – ZONE &
SIGNAL
SOURCE/REC SEL
SELECT
CONTROL ON/OFF
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO L RAUDIO
PROCESSING
STEREO/
SB ch
F.S.SURR
The Auto MCACC display appears once the microphone is connected.
3 Make sure ‘ MCACC preset
1
DVD/LD
1. Auto MCACC
Surr Back System [Normal (default)]
Save SYMMETRY to [M1. MEMORY 1 ]
START
ENTER:Start :Cancel
Normal (Default)
3
then select
-
55.0
dB
’ is selected,2 select an
4
START
.
4 Follow the instructions on-screen.
Make sure the microphone is connected, and if you’re using a subwoofer, make sure it is switched on and set to a comfortable volume level.
5 Wait for the test tones to finish then confirm the speaker configuration in the OSD.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while
it’s doing this.
5
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the speaker configuration check screen is being displayed, the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in step 6.
8
En
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Note
1 • You can’t use the System Setup menu in either the main or sub zone when the iPod, HOME MEDIA GALLAERY (VSX-94TXH only), XM or SIRIUS Radio input source is selected. When you set ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 to ON (page 60), you can’t use the System Setup menu.
• If you cancel the Auto MCACC Setup, or leave an error message for over three minutes, the screen saver will appear. 2 • If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read through Surround back speaker setting on page 39 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 4.
• If you have THX-certified speakers, select CUSTOM and choose YES for the THX Speaker setting. 3 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now (you can rename it later in Data Management on page 45). 4 Note that correction curves are saved only when set to SYMMETRY. Select CUSTOM to save other correction curves (such as ALL CH ADJUST and FRONT ALIGN). See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 36 for more on this. 5 Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.
Page 9
5 minute guide
GUIDE
CATEGORY
02
• With error messages (such as Too much ambient noise! or Check Microphone) select RETRY after
checking for ambient noise (see Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup below) and verifying the
mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and continue.
DVD/LD
1. Auto MCACC
Now Analyzing… ( 2/11)
Environment Check Ambient Noise [ OK ] Microphone [ ] Speaker YES/NO [ ]
0.0
:Cancel
dB
DVD/LD
1. Auto MCACC
CHECK Front [ YES ] Center [ YES ] Surr [ YES ] SB [ YESx2 ] SW [ YES ]
OK
10:Next
0.0
:Cancel
dB
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the actual speakers you have.
1
If you see an error message (ERR) in the right side column (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t correct), there may be a problem with the speaker connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the power and check the speaker connections. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use / to select the speaker and / to change the setting (and number for surround back) and continue.
6 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press
ENTER
.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs more test tones to determine the optimum receiver settings for Channel Level, Speaker Distance, Standing Wave, Acoustic Cal EQ and Full Band Phase Control.
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.
7 The Auto MCACC Setup has finished! Press to go back to the System Setup menu.
RETURN
2
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver upon completion of the Auto MCACC setup.
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is also possible to adjust these settings manually using the
System Setup menu (starting on page 36).
3
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup
If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto MCACC Setup (too much background noise, echo off the walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch them off if necessary. If there are any instructions showing in the front panel display, please follow them.
• Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of the microphone. If this seems to be happening, switch off the TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setup.
Playing a source
Here are the basic instructions for playing a source (such as a DVD disc) with your home theater system.
TV CONTROL
INPUT
TV CH
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
XM RADIO
HDMI
CD-R
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
BD TV CTRL
SIRIUS
TUNER
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
CD
DVD TV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
TV VOL
ANT
MPX
AUDIO SUBTITLE
PHOTO
SIGNAL SEL
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
1 Switch on your system components and receiver.
Start by switching on the playback component (for example a DVD player), your TV
4
and subwoofer (if you
have one), then the receiver (press RECEIVER).
• Make sure the setup mic is disconnected.
2 Select the input source you want to play.
You can use the input source buttons on the remote control, INPUT SELECT, or the front panel INPUT
SELECTOR dial.
5
SELECT
DISP
THX
PHASE
REC
T.DISP
INFO
REC STOP
MEMORY
HDD
CH
STEREO/
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
VOL
MUTE
DVD
CH
Note
1 If you’re using the front panel display, the diagram in Listening to Surround Sound above indicates (in bold) how each speaker is displayed. 2 You can also choose to view the settings from the MCACC Data Check screen. See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 36 for more on this. 3 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm (5 inches) will end up with different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 47.
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed. 4 Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver (for example, if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO 1 jacks on y our TV, make sure th at the VIDEO 1 input is now selected). 5 If you need to manually switch the input signal type press SIGNAL SEL (page 31).
9
En
Page 10
02
5 minute guide
3 Press SURROUND’ and start playback of the source.
S.DIRECT (STREAM DIRECT
) to select ‘AUTO
1
If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround sound DVD disc, you should hear surround sound. If you are playing a stereo source, you will only hear sound from the front left/right speakers in the default listening mode.
• See also Listening to your system on page 28 for information on different ways of listening to sources.
4 Use the volume control to adjust the volume level.
Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is coming from the speakers connected to this receiver.
Better sound using Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control
This receiver is equipped with the two types of functions that correct phase distortion and group delay: Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control. Activating Full Band Phase Control is strongly recommended because it also involves the effects of Phase Control. For details on each of these two features, refer to the following explanations.
Using Phase Control
During multichannel playback, LFE (Low-Frequency Effects) signals as well as low-frequency signals in each channel are assigned to the subwoofer or other the subwoofer and the most appropriate speaker. At least in theory, however, this type of processing involves a group delay that varies with frequency, resulting in phase distortion where the low-frequency sound is delayed or muffled by the conflict with other channels. With the Phase Control mode switched on, this receiver can reproduce powerful bass sound without deteriorating the quality of the original sound (see illustration below).
Phase Cotrol OFF
Listening
position
Sound muffled due to a delay in time
Sound source
Front speaker
Subwoofer
• Rhythms blurred and difficult to hear
• Bass sound with loss of depth
• Sound of musical instruments with no reality
Phase Control ON
Listening
position
Original sound preserved with no loss of clarity
Sound source
Front speaker
Subwoofer
• Rhythms with crystal-like clarity
• Bass sound with no loss of depth
• Sound of musical instruments with superb reality Phase Control technology provides coherent sound reproduction through the use of phase matching
2
for an optimal sound image at your listening position. The default setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase Control switched on for all sound sources.
T.DISP
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
PHOTO
SIGNAL SEL
THX
PHASE
STEREO/
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
• Press PHASE (PHASE CONTROL) to select PHASE CONTROL. The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front panel lights.
10
En
Note
1 • You may need to check the digital audio output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It should be set to output Dolby Digital, DTS and
88.2 kHz / 96 kHz PCM (2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG audio option, set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.
• Depending on your DVD player or source discs, you may only get digital 2 channel stereo and analog sound. In this case, the receiver must be set to a multichannel listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 28 if you need to do this) if you want multichannel surround sound. 2 • Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper sound reproduction. If two waveforms are ‘in phase’, they crest and trough together, resulting in increased amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest of a wave meets a trough (as shown in the upper section of the diagram above) then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an unreliable sound image will be produced.
• The PHASE CONTROL feature is available even when the headphones are plugged in.
• If your subwoofer has a phase control switch, set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0°). However, the effect you can actually feel when PHASE CONTROL is set to ON on this receiver depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set your subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is also recommended you try changing the orientation or the place of your subwoofer.
• Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to OFF. If this cannot be done on your subwoofer, set the cutoff frequency to a higher value.
• If the speaker distance is not properly set, you may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL effect.
• The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:
– When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on. – When MULTI CH IN is selected. – When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options.
Page 11
5 minute guide
02
Using Full Band Phase Control
The Full Band Phase Control feature calibrates the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers connected. Standard speakers designed exclusively for audio use generally reproduce sound with the divided frequency bands output from a speaker system consisting of multiple speakers (in case of typical 3-way speakers, for instance, the tweeter, the squawker (midrange), and the woofer output sound in the high-, middle-, and low­frequency ranges, respectively). Though these speakers are designed to flatten the frequency-amplitude characteristics across wide ranges, there are cases where the group delay characteristics are not effectively flattened. This phase distortion of the speakers subsequently causes group delay (the delay of low­frequency sound against high-frequency sound) during audio signal playback. This receiver analyzes the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers by calibrating test signals output from the speakers with the supplied microphone, therefore flattening the analyzed frequency-phase
characteristics during audio signal playback correction is made for a pair of left and right speakers. This correction minimizes group delay between the ranges of a speaker and improves the frequency-phase characteristics across all ranges.
Furthermore, the enhanced frequency-phase characteristics between channels ensure better
surround sound integration for multichannel setting.
Full Band Phase Control OFF
Tweeter
Midrange
Woofer
Group Delay Characteristics
ms
1
– the same
2
Sound in the middle- and low-frequency ranges is delayed against the high-frequency sound due to group delay.
Full Band Phase Control ON
Tweeter
Midrange
Woofer
Group Delay Characteristics
ms
Hz
With the phase distortion corrected, the frequency-phase characteristics are improved across all ranges.
• Sound with live dynamics
• Sound of musical instruments with superb reality
• Sound so accurately reproduced that you can even hear the lip movement of the singer
• Speech heard with no loss of clarity
• Surround sound with excellent integration
T.DISP
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
PHOTO
SIGNAL SEL
THX
PHASE
STEREO/
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
• Press PHASE (PHASE CONTROL) to select FULLBAND PHASE.
3
Both the Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control functions are switched on. The FULL BAND PHASE CTRL indicator lights on the front panel display.
Hz
Note
1 To calibrate and analyze the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers, follow the procedures in Auto MCACC (see Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8) or FULL BAND PHASE CTRL in the System Setup (see Full Band Phase Control on page 44).
Select ALL when you perform the Auto MCACC setup with CUSTOM. Upon calibration of the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers, the FULL BAND PHASE CTRL feature is automatically switched on. Note that FULLBAND PHASE cannot be selected unless the frequency-phase characteristics of
the speakers are calibrated. 2 The original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the targeted characteristics after correction can be displayed graphically in the OSD (see Full Band Phase Control on page 44). Also, when your PC is connected to this receiver, the original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the corrected characteristics of group delay can be displayed in 3-dimension on your PC (see Advanced MCACC output using your PC on page 64). 3• The FULL BAND PHASE CTRL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:
– When headphones are plugged in. – When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on. – When MULTI CH IN is selected. – When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options.
11
En
Page 12
03
Connecting your equipment
Chapter 3:
Connecting your equipment
This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This page explains the kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.
Rear panel
This illustration shows the VSX-94TXH, however connections for the 92TXH are the same except where noted.
6
1
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
OPTICAL
2
1
IN (TV/
SAT
2
IN (BD)
3
IN (
DVR/
VCR 1
4
IN (
CD-R
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
IN (
DVD/
)
LD
2
IN
COAXIAL
3
IN
XM
)
)
)
1
(CD)
ASSIGNABLE
4
5
4
21
DIGITAL
HDMI
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
41
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
1
CONTROL
7
IN
OUT
2
1
IN
8
Y
(
DVD/
)
LD
3
B
P
PR
4
2
IN
Y
(BD)
B
P
PR
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
(
1
IN
(BD)
2
IN
ASSIGN­ABLE
(
VIDEO/GAME
IR
DVD/LD
1
9
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
DVD/LD
12
TV/SAT
1
IN
VIDEO / GAME 1
2
IN
VIDEO AUDIO
AM LOOP
R
OUT
IN
BD IN
IN
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
FM UNBAL 75
OUT
10
MONI­TOR
MONI-
OUT
TOR
)
OUT
11
2
OUT
Y
B
P
PR
3
IN
Y
B
P
PR
1)
31
S-VIDEO
ANTENNA
ZONE2ZONE2
R L
13
PHONO
IN
L
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/ TAPE / MD
IN
R
R
14
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
15
( TOTAL 50 mA MAX
DC OUT 12V/
AUDIO
SURROUND BACK
1
12 V TRIGGER
CENTER
)
PRE OUT
LR
16
FRONT
CENTER
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
SUR­ROUND BACK
(
)
Single
LR
SIRIUS
17
L
L
LR
2
FRONT
18
19
RS-232C
MULTI CH IN
IN
SPEAKERS
A
IN
RL RLR L
20
iPod
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK /
FRONT
21
SWITCHED 100 W(0.8 A) MAX
AC OUTLET
B
SELECTABLE
(
)
Single
12
En
Caution
• Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.
1 Optical digital audio output(s)
Use the OUT1 and (VSX-94TXH only) OUT2 jack for recording to a CD or MiniDisc recorder. See Connecting digital audio sources on page 17.
The
OUT1
jack is also used for MULTI-ZONE connections.
See MULTI-ZONE listening on page 59.
2 Optical and coaxial digital audio inputs (x6)
Use for digital audio sources, including DVD players/ recorders, digital satellite receivers, CD players, etc.
See also The Input Setup menu on page 67 to assign the inputs.
3 XM Radio input
See Using XM Radio on page 51.
4 LAN (10/100) terminal
(VSX-94TXH only)
For details, refer to the supplied operating instructions for HOME MEDIA GALLERY.
5 HDMI connectors (x4)
(VSX-92TXH)
(x5)
(VSX-94TXH)
Multiple inputs and one output for high-quality audio/ video connection to compatible HDMI devices. See Connecting using HDMI on page 55.
6 Remote inputs (MULTI-ZONE and source)
Use for connection to an external remote control sensor for use in a MULTI-ZONE setup, for example. See Connecting an IR receiver on page 61.
7 Control input/output
Use to connect other Pioneer components so that you can control all your equipment from a single IR remote sensor.
See Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s sensor on page 82.
8 Component video connections (x4)
Use the inputs to connect any video source that has component video output, such as a DVD recorder. Use the output for connection to a monitor or TV. See Using the component video jacks on page 16.
9 AM and FM antenna terminals
Use to connect indoor or outdoor antennas for radio broadcasts. See Connecting antennas on page 21.
10 MULTI-ZONE and source outputs
Use to connect a second amplifier in a separate room. See MULTI-ZONE listening on page 59.
11 Composite and S-video monitor outputs
Use to connect monitors and TVs. See Connecting your TV and DVD player on page 14.
Page 13
Connecting your equipment
12 Audio/video source inputs/(outputs) (x6)
Use for connection to audio/visual sources, such as DVD players/recorders, VCRs, etc. Each set of inputs has jacks
for composite video, S-video See Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other
video sources on page 16.
13 Stereo analog audio source inputs/(outputs) (x3)
Use for connection to audio sources such as CD players, tape decks, turntables, etc. See Connecting analog audio sources on page 18.
14 Multichannel analog audio inputs
7.1 channel inputs for connection to a DVD player with multichannel analog outputs. See Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on page 56.
15 12 V trigger jacks
Use to switch components in your system on and off according to the input function of the receiver. See Switching components on and off using the 12 volt trigger on page 61.
16 Multichannel pre-amplifier outputs
Use to connect separate amplifiers for center, surround, surround back and subwoofer channels. See Connecting additional amplifiers on page 58 (see also Installing your speaker system on page 19 for powered subwoofer connection).
17 SIRIUS Radio input
See Using SIRIUS Radio on page 53
18 iPod input terminal
Use to connect your Apple iPod as an audio or video source. See Connecting an iPod on page 50.
19 RS-232C connector
Use for connection to a PC for graphical output when using Advanced MCACC or Full Band Phase Control. See Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 63.
20 Speaker terminals
Use for connection to the main front, center, surround and surround back speakers. See Installing your speaker system on page 19.
21 Switched AC power outlet
Use to power another component in the system. Power to the outlet switches on and off with the receiver.
See AC outlet on page 22.
1
and stereo analog audio.
(total 50 mA max.)
(100 W/0.8 A max.)
(x2)
When making cable connections
• To avoid hum, do not lay connected cables over the top of the receiver.
• When connecting optical cables, be careful when inserting the plug not to damage the shutter protecting the optical socket.
• When storing optical cable, coil loosely. The cable may be damaged if bent around sharp corners.
About the video converter
The video converter ensures that all video sources are output through all of the MONITOR VIDEO OUT jacks. The only exception is HDMI and high-definition component video: since these resolutions cannot be downsampled, you must connect your monitor/TV to the receiver’s HDMI/component video outputs when
connecting these video sources. If several video components are assigned to the same
input function (see The Input Setup menu on page 67), the converter gives priority to HDMI, component, S-video, then composite (in that order).
• For optimal video performance, THX recommends switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the
Video options on page 72) OFF.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
2
03
Note
1 You must assign the input source to the S-video input to which you’ve connected your video component (see The Input Setup menu on page 67). 2 If the video signal does not appear on your TV or plasma display, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. Note that some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In this case, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the Video options on page 72) OFF.
13
En
Page 14
03
N
R
N
R
Connecting your equipment
Connecting your TV and DVD player
TV
VIDEOINS-VIDEO
IN
1
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
IN
1
OUT2
MAIN
IN
2
LAN (10/100)
ZONE2
HDMI
OPTICAL
1
IN
CONTROL
1
IN
IN
(TV/
)
SAT
OUT
2
IN
2
IN
(BD)
IN
Y
3
IN (
DVR/
(
DVD/
)
VCR 1
LD
3
IN
4
CD-R
DVD/
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
)
2
COAXIAL
IN
)
1
1
(CD)
4
2
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
P
PR
4
IN
IN
Y
(BD)
P
OUT
PR
41
IN (
IN ( LD
IN
XM
VSX-94TXH
COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT VIDEO OUT
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
(
1
DVD/LD
IN
(BD)
2
IN
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
)
B
2
B
(
VIDEO/GAME
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
FM UNBAL 75
IR
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
MONI- TOR OUT
)
21
OUT
Y
P
B
PR
3
IN
Y
B
P
PR
1)
31
S-VIDEOOPTICAL
S-VIDEO
MONI­TOR OUT
1
IN
2
IN
VIDEO AUDIO
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
BD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO / GAME 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
AUDIORL
ANALOG OUT
AM LOOP
R
ANTENNA
ZONE2ZONE2
R L
AUDIO
PHONO
IN
L
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/ TAPE/ MD
IN
R
R
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
R
SURROU
1
12 V T
(
DC OUT 12V/ TOTAL 50 mA
1 Connect the
MONITOR OUT
video jack to a video
input on your TV.
Use a standard RCA/phono jack video cable to connect to the composite video jack, or for higher quality video, use an S-video cable to connect to the S-video jack.
2 Connect a composite or S-video output on your DVD player to the
DVD/LD VIDEO
or
DVD/LD S-VIDEO
input.
Connect using a standard video cable or an S-video cable.
3 Connect a coaxial-type1 digital audio output on your DVD player to the
COAXIAL IN 1 (DVD/LD
) input.
Use a coaxial cable designed for digital audio.
4 Connect the stereo audio outputs on your DVD player to the
DVD/LD AUDIO
inputs.
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack cable.
• If your DVD player has multichannel analog outputs, you can connect these instead. See also Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on page 56.
Connecting your Blu-ray disc player
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
OPTICAL
1
IN (TV/
)
SAT
2
IN (BD)
3
IN (
DVR/
)
VCR 1
4
IN (
)
CD-R
1
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
IN
(
DVD/
)
LD
(CD)
2
IN
COAXIAL
IN
XM
ASSIGNABLE
VSX-94TXH
4
21
DIGITAL
HDMI
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
41
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
1
CONTROL
IN
OUT
2
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
)
LD
3
P
B
PR
4
2
IN
Y
(BD)
B
P
PR
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
1
IN
2
IN
(
VIDEO/GAME
( (BD)
DVD/LD
ASSIGN­ABLE
FM UNBAL 75
IR
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
)
21
OUT
Y
P
B
PR
3
IN
Y
B
P
PR
1)
31
MONI­TOR OUT
S-VIDEO
MONI­TOR OUT
1
IN
2
IN
VIDEO AUDIO
GAME 1
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
BD IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO /
IN
OUT
DVR/ VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/ VCR 2
IN
AM LOOP
R
ANTENNA
ZONE2ZONE2
R L
AUDIO
PHONO
IN
L
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/ TAPE/ MD
IN
R
R
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
R
SURROU
1
12 V T
(
DC OUT 12V/ TOTAL 50 mA
14
En
3
2 4
DVD player
The diagram shows a basic setup of this receiver together with a TV and DVD player, with S-video or composite video connections. Different TVs and DVD players may offer alternative connections. See also Using the
COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT VIDEO OUT
3 2 4
S-VIDEOOPTICAL
AUDIORL
ANALOG OUT
component video jacks on page 16 if your TV and/or DVD player has component video inputs/outputs. If your DVD player offers multichannel analog audio outputs, see
Blu-ray disc player
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on page 56.
Note
1 If your DVD player only has an optical digital output, you can connect it to one of the optical inputs on this receiver using an optical cable. When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 67).
Page 15
Connecting your equipment
N
R
M
The diagram shows a basic setup of this receiver together with a Blu-ray disc player, with S-video or composite video connections. See also Using the component video jacks on page 16 if your Blu-ray disc player has component video inputs/outputs. If your Blu-ray disc player offers multi-channel analog audio outputs, see Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on page 56.
1 Connect a composite or S-video output on your Blu­ray disc player to the
Connect using a standard video cable or an S-video cable.
2 Connect an optical-type1 digital audio output on your Blu-ray disc player to the
Connect using an optical cable.
3 Connect the stereo audio outputs on your Blu-ray disc player to the
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack cable.
• If your Blu-ray disc player has multi-channel analog outputs, you can connect these instead. See also Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on page 56.
BD VIDEO
BD AUDIO
or
BD S-VIDEO
OPTICAL IN 2 (BD)
inputs.
input.
input.
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other set-top box
Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top boxes’.
VSX-94TXH
OPTICAL
XM
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
1
IN (TV/
SAT
2
IN (BD)
3
IN (
DVR/
VCR 1
4
IN (
CD-R
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
IN (
DVD/
)
LD
2
IN
COAXIAL
IN
)
)
)
1
(CD)
4
21
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
41
HDMI
1
IN
2
IN
3
IN
4
IN
OUT
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
CONTROL
IN IN
IN
OUT
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
)
LD
P
B
PR
2
IN
Y
(BD)
P
B
PR
(
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
(
1
DVD/LD
(BD)
2
ASSIGN­ABLE
VIDEO/GAME
FM UNBAL 75
IR
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
)
21
OUT
Y
P
B
PR
3
IN
Y
P
B
PR
1)
31
MONI­TOR OUT
S-VIDEO
MONI­TOR OUT
1
IN
2
IN
VIDEO AUDIO
DVD/LD
TV/SAT
VIDEO / GAME 1
OUT
IN
BD IN
IN
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
AM LOOP
R
ANTENNA
ZONE2ZONE2
R L
L
PHONO
IN
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/ TAPE/ MD
IN
R
R
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
R
( TOTAL 50 mA
AUDIO
SURROU
1
DC OUT 12V/
12 V T
03
DIGITAL OUT
VIDEO S-VIDEOAUDIORL
AV OUT
STB
1 Connect the audio/video outputs on the set-top box to the
TV/SAT AUDIO
and
VIDEO
inputs.
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack cable and a video or S-video
2
cable.
2 Connect an optical-type3 digital audio output from your set-top box to the
OPTICAL IN 1 (TV/SAT
) input.
Use an optical cable for the connection.
Note
1 If your Blu-ray disc player only has an coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using an coaxial cable. When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the player to (see The System Setup menu on page 36.). 2See The Input Setup menu on page 67 to assign the S-VIDEO 2 input to the TV/SAT input function if you make this connection. 3 If your set-top box only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial digital audio cable. When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the set-top box to (see The Input Setup menu on page 67). 4 If your satellite/cable receiver doesn’t have a digital audio output, you can skip this step.
4
15
En
Page 16
03
R
F
R
F
Connecting your equipment
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other video sources
This receiver has two sets of audio/video inputs and outputs suitable for connecting analog or digital video devices, including DVD/HDD recorders and VCRs.
3 If the device can output digital audio, connect an optical-type
the
Use an optical cable for the connection.
• For a second recorder, use the DVR/VCR2 outputs.
1
digital audio output from the recorder to
OPTICAL IN 3 (DVR/VCR1
) input.
2
VSX-94TXH
OPTICAL COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT
OPTICAL
XM
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
1
IN (TV/
SAT
2
IN (BD)
3
IN (
DVR/
VCR 1
4
IN (
CD-R
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
IN (
DVD/
)
LD
2
IN
COAXIAL
IN
)
)
1
1
(CD)
)
4
2
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
41
HDMI
1
2
3
4
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
CONTROL
IN IN
IN
OUT
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
)
LD
P
B
PR
2
IN
Y
(BD)
P
B
PR
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
FM UNBAL 75
IR
OUT
MONI­TOR
MONI-
OUT
TOR
(
)
1
DVD/LD
OUT
(BD)
2
ASSIGN­ABLE
21
OUT
Y
IN
P
B
IN
PR
3
IN
Y
P
B
PR
(
1)
VIDEO/GAME
31
S-VIDEO
VIDEOAUDIORL
S-VIDEO AUDIORL
AV OUT
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
DVD/LD
TV/SAT
1
VIDEO / GAME 1
2
VIDEO AUDIO
OUT
IN
BD
IN
IN
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
AM LOOP
R
ANTENNA
ZONE2ZONE2
R L
AV IN
AUDIO
PHONO
IN
L
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/ TAPE/ MD
IN
R
R
SUB W.
SUR- ROUND
SURROUND BACK
1
12 V TRIGGER
(
DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
VIDEO S-VIDEO
L
L
CENTE
LR
2
)
1 23
DVR, VCR, etc.
1 Connect the audio/video outputs of the video player/recorder to the
DVR/VCR1 AUDIO
and
VIDEO
inputs.
Use a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable for the audio connection and a video or S-video cable for the video connection.
• For a second recorder, use the DVR/VCR2 IN inputs.
2 If the device can record, connect the AUDIO
and
VIDEO
outputs to the recorder’s audio/
DVR/VCR1
video inputs.
Use a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable for the audio connection and a video or S-video cable for the video connection.
Using the component video jacks
Component video should give superior picture quality when compared to composite or S-video. You can also take advantage of progressive scan video (if your source and TV are both compatible), which delivers a very stable, flicker-free picture. See the manuals that came with your TV and source component to check whether they are compatible with progressive-scan video.
VSX-94TXH
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
OPTICAL
1
IN (TV/
)
SAT
2
IN (BD)
3
IN (
DVR/
)
VCR 1
4
IN (
)
CD-R
1
4
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
1
2
IN
(
DVD/
)
LD
(CD)
2
IN
COAXIAL
IN
XM
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
1
2
HDMI
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
41
Y
B
P
PR
COMPONENT
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
1
CONTROL
IN
OUT
2
IN
(
DVD/
LD
3
4
IN
(BD)
VIDEO
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
(
1
IN
(BD)
2
IN
1
Y
)
B
P
PR
2
Y
B
P
PR
(
VIDEO/GAME
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
B
P
PR
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FM UNBAL 75
IR
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
MONI­TOR
MONI-
OUT
TOR
)
DVD/LD
OUT
ASSIGN­ABLE
21
OUT
Y
IN
B
P
IN
PR
3
IN
Y
B
P
PR
1)
31
S-VIDEO
TV
DVD player
1 Connect the component video outputs of your source to a set of
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
Connect using a three-way component video cable.
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
BD
IN
TV/SAT
1
IN
VIDEO /
GAME 1
2
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
VIDEO AUDIO
AM LOOP
R
ANTENNA
ZONE2ZONE2
R L
L
AUDIO
PHONO
IN
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/ TAPE/ MD
IN
R
R
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
SURROUND BACK
1
(
DC OUT 12V/ TOTAL 50 mA MAX
CENTE
12 V TRIGGER
)
inputs.
L
L
LR
2
16
En
Note
1 • In order to record, you must connect the analog audio cables (the digital connection is for playback only).
• If your video component doesn’t have a digital audio output, you can skip this step. 2 If your recorder only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial digital audio cable. When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 67).
Page 17
Connecting your equipment
E
2
L
L
L
03
• Since they are assignable, it doesn’t matter which component video inputs you use for which source. After connecting everything, you’ll need to assign the component video inputs—see
2 Connect the
The Input Setup menu
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
on page 67.
jacks to the
component video inputs on your TV or monitor.
Use a three-way component video cable.
Connecting digital audio sources
This receiver has both digital inputs and outputs, allowing you to connect digital audio components for playback and for making digital recordings.
Most digital components also have analog connections. See Connecting analog audio sources on the following page if you want to connect these too.
VSX-94TXH
OPTICAL
XM
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
1
IN
(TV/
2
IN
(BD)
3
IN
(
DVR/ VCR 1
4
IN
(
CD-R
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
IN
(
DVD/
)
LD
2
IN
COAXIAL
IN
SAT
(CD)
)
)
)
41
1
2
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
HDMI
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
41
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
1
CONTROL
IN
OUT
2
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
)
LD
3
P
B
PR
4
2
IN
Y
(BD)
P
B
PR
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
1
IN
2
IN
(
VIDEO/GAME
(
DVD/LD
(BD)
ASSIGN­ABLE
FM UNBAL 75
IR
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
)
21
OUT
Y
P
B
PR
3
IN
Y
P
B
PR
1)
31
MONI­TOR OUT
S-VIDEO
MONI­TOR OUT
1
IN
2
IN
VIDEO AUDIO
DVD/LD
TV/SAT
VIDEO / GAME 1
OUT
IN
BD
IN
IN
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
AM LOOP
R
ANTENNA
ZONE2ZONE2
R L
PHONO
IN
L
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/ TAPE/ MD
IN
R
R
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
R
(
DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
AUDIO
SURROUND BACK
1
12 V TRIGGER
CENT
)
1 Connect an optical-type1 digital audio output on your digital component to the
OPTICAL IN 4 (CD-R
)
input.
Use an optical cable for the connection.
2 For recording equipment, connect one of the optical-type DIGITAL outputs to a digital input on the recorder.
Use an optical cable to connect to the DIGITAL OUT1 or (VSX-94TXH only) OUT2 (OUT1 is shown in the
illustration).
2
1 2
OPTICAL COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL IN
CD-R, MD, DAT, etc.
Note
1 • If your digital component only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial cable. When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the component to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 67).
• The digital outputs from other components can be connected to any spare digital audio inputs on this receiver. You can assign them when setting up
the receiver (see also The Input Setup menu on page 67). 2 • You must switch ZONE 3 ON in Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on page 60 to hear audio from the DIGITAL OUT1.
• In order to record some digital sources, you must make analog connections as explained in Connecting analog audio sources below.
17
En
Page 18
03
N
T
Connecting your equipment
About the WMA9 Pro decoder
This unit has an on-board Windows Media™ Audio 9 Professional
playback WMA9 Pro-encoded audio using a coaxial or optical digital connection when connected to a WMA9 Pro­compatible player. However, the connected PC, DVD player, set-top box, etc. must be able to output WMA9 Pro format audio signals through a coaxial or optical digital output.
1
(WMA9 Pro) decoder, so it is possible to
1 Connect the analog audio outputs of the source
AUDIO
component to one of the
inputs.
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable.
• If you’re connecting a tape deck, MD recorder, etc., connect the analog audio outputs (OUT) to the analog audio inputs on the recorder.
2
Turntables only:
PHONO
the
Connect the stereo audio outputs to
inputs.
• If your turntable has a grounding wire, secure it to the ground terminal on this receiver.
Connecting analog audio sources
This receiver features three stereo audio-only inputs. Two of these inputs have corresponding outputs for use with
• If your turntable has line-level outputs (i.e., it has a built-in phono pre-amp), connect it to the CD inputs instead.
audio recorders. One of the audio inputs (PHONO) is a dedicated
turntable input which should not be used for any other type of component. This input also has a grounding terminal that most turntables require.
Connecting a component to the front panel inputs
The front panel inputs comprise a composite video jack (VIDEO), an S-video jack (S-VIDEO), stereo analog audio
2
inputs (AUDIO L/R) and an optical digital audio input (DIGITAL). You can use these connections for any kind of audio/video component, but they are especially
urntable
convenient for portable equipment such as camcorders, video games and portable audio/video equipment.
• Push down on the lower portion of the front panel door to access the front video connections.
VSX-94TXH
PRE OUT
AUDIO
FM UNBAL 75
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
MONI­TOR
MONI-
OUT
TOR
S-VIDEO
OUT
1
IN
2
IN
VIDEO AUDIO
IN
ZONE2ZONE2
R
L
CD
IN
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
OUT
BD
IN
CD-R/ TAPE/ MD
TV/SAT
IN
IN
R
R
VIDEO / GAME 1
IN
SUB W.
OUT
SUR-
DVR/
ROUND
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
SURROUND BACK
VCR 2
IN
1
12 V TRIGGER
R
L
(
DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
ANTENNA
PHONO
AM LOOP
LR
FRONT
CENTER
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
SUR­ROUND BACK
(
)
Single
LR
SIRIUS
L
IN
L
SPEAKERS
FRONT
CENTER
LR
2
MULTI CH IN
)
IN
iPod
RS-232C
FRONT
A
RL
CE
PHONES
TV game, video camera, etc.
PARAMETER
AUDIO VIDEO
(TUNE)
(ST) (ST)
ENTER
(TUNE)
SETUP
RETURN
TUNER EDITSPEAKERS BAND
MCACC
USB
SETUP MIC
MULTI – ZONE &
SOURCE/REC SEL
CONTROL ON/OFF
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO L RAUDIO
VIDEO OUTPUT
DIGITAL OUT
SIGNAL SELECT
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
SB ch
PROCESSING
STEREO/ F.S.SURR
• Select these inputs using INPUT SELECT (remote) or
1
OUT
PLAY
IN
REC
R L
AUDIO IN/OUT
the INPUT SELECTOR dial (front panel) to select VIDEO/GAME 2.
18
En
Tape deck, etc.
Note
1 • Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• With WMA9 Pro, sound problems may occur depending on your computer system. Note that WMA9 Pro 96 kHz sources will be downsampled to 48 kHz.
Page 19
Connecting your equipment
Installing your speaker system
To take full advantage of the receiver’s surround sound capabilities connect front, center, surround and surround back speakers, as well as a subwoofer. Although this is ideal, other configurations with fewer speakers—no subwoofer or no center speaker, or even no surround speakers—will work. At the very least, front left and right speakers only are necessary. Note that your
03
main surround speakers should always be connected as a pair, but you can connect just one surround back speaker if you like (it must be connected to the left surround back terminal). You can use speakers with a nominal impedance between 6 to 16 (please see Switching the speaker impedance on page 74 if you plan to use speakers with an impedance of less than 8 Ω).
Subwoofer
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
OPTICAL
1
IN (TV/
)
SAT
2
IN (BD)
3
IN (
DVR/
)
VCR 1
4
IN (
)
CD-R
1
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
1
IN
(
DVD/
)
LD
(CD)
2
IN
COAXIAL
IN
XM
VSX-94TXH
4
2
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
HDMI
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
41
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
1
CONTROL
IN
OUT
2
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
)
LD
3
B
P
P
R
4
2
IN
Y
(BD)
P
B
P
R
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
1
IN
2
IN
(
VIDEO/GAME
Front left
IR
OUT
(
DVD/LD (BD)
ASSIGN­ABLE
21
OUT
IN
Front
Center
PRE OUT
AUDIO
FM UNBAL 75
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
MONI­TOR
MONI-
OUT
TOR
)
OUT
Y
1
IN
B
P
2
IN
P
R
3
Y
P
B
P
R
1)
31
S-VIDEO
VIDEO AUDIO
IN
ZONE2ZONE2
R
L
CD
IN
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
OUT
BD
IN
CD-R/ TAPE/ MD
TV/SAT
IN
IN
R
R
VIDEO / GAME 1
IN
SUB W.
OUT
SUR-
DVR/
ROUND
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
SURROUND BACK
VCR 2
IN
1
12 V TRIGGER
R L
(
DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
ANTENNA
PHONO
AM LOOP
LR
FRONT
CENTER
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
SUR­ROUND BACK
(
)
Single
LR
SIRIUS
L
IN
L
SPEAKERS
FRONT
A
IN
CENTER
LR
)
RL RLR L
iPod
RS-232C
2
MULTI CH IN
right
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK /
FRONT
AC OUTLET
SWITCHED 100 W(0.8 A) MAX
B
(
Single
SELECTABLE
)
Surround left
Surround back left
Connecting the speakers
Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a positive (+) and negative (–) terminal. Make sure to match these up with the terminals on the speakers themselves.
Surround
right
Surround back right
Caution
• Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal. If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel it may cause the power to cut off as a safety measure.
19
En
Page 20
03
Connecting your equipment
Bare wire connections
Make sure that the speaker cable you’re going to use is
3
properly prepared with about 10 mm (
/8 in.) of insulator stripped from each wire, and the exposed wire strands twisted together (fig. A).
To connect a terminal, unscrew the terminal a few turns until there is enough space to insert the exposed wire (fig. B). Once the wire is in position, tighten the terminal until the wire is firmly clamped (fig. C).
fig. A fig. B fig. C
10 mm (3/8 in.)
Banana plug connections
If you want to use speaker cables terminated with banana plugs, screw the speaker terminal fully shut then plug the banana plug into the end of the speaker terminal.
Important
• Please refer to the manual that came with your speakers for details on how to connect the other end of the speaker cables to your speakers.
Other connections on page 50 provides greater detail on alternate speaker setups, such as using speaker system B (page 57), bi-amping (page 57) and bi­wiring (page 58).
• If you are using a THX certified subwoofer use the THX INPUT jack on the subwoofer (if your subwoofer has one) or switch the filter position to THX on your subwoofer.
• When placing speakers near the TV, we recommend using magnetically shielded speakers to prevent possible interference, such as discoloration of the picture when the TV is switched on. If you do not have magnetically shielded speakers and notice discoloration of the TV picture, move the speakers farther away from the TV.
• If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place them at a narrower angle.
• Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.
• It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
• Surround and surround back speakers should be positioned 60 cm to 90 cm (1.5 ft. to 3 ft.) higher than your ears and titled slight downward. Make sure the speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly behind the listener than for home theater playback.
• Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
• To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below. Be sure all speakers are installed securely to prevent accidents and improve sound quality.
Surround
left
Front
left
Center
Subwoofer
Front right
Surround
right
20
En
Placing the speakers
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.
• The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.
• For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m (6 ft. to 9 ft.) apart, at equal distance from the TV.
Listening position
Surround back Surround back
left right
Single surround back speaker
Caution
• Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality, but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.
Page 21
Connecting your equipment
The diagrams below show suggested surround and surround back speaker orientation. The first diagram (fig. A) shows orientation with one surround back speaker (or none) connected. The second (fig. B) shows orientation with two surround back speakers connected.
º
90º to 120
LS
LS
RS
RS
03
Connecting antennas
The supplied antennas provide a simple way to listen to AM and FM radio. If you find that reception quality is poor, an outdoor antenna should give you better sound quality—see Connecting external antennas below.
º
0º to 60
LS
SB
RS
SBL
SBL
SBR
SBR
fig. A fig. B
• If you have two surround back speakers THX recommends placing them together and the same distance from your listening position (see below).
THX speaker system setup
If you have a complete THX speaker system, follow the diagram below to place your speakers. Note that the
surround speakers ( indicates bi-polar radiating speakers) should output at an angle parallel to the listener.
L
SL
Surround
• If you have two surround back speakers THX recommends placing them together and the same distance from your listening position for the following THX modes: THX Select2 CINEMA, THX MUSICMODE and THX GAMES MODE.
See also THX Audio Setting on page 49 to make the settings that will give you the best sound experience when using the Home THX modes (page 29).
CR
SR
Surround
SBL SBR
Surround back
VSX-94TXH
PHONO
IN
L
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/ TAPE/ MD
IN
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
AUDIO
R
SURROUND BACK
1
12 V TRIGGER
( DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
PRE OUT
LR
FRONT
CENTER
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
SUR­ROUND BACK
(
)
Single
LR
SIRIUS
L
IN
LLRR
SPEAKERS
FRONT
CENTER
2
)
MULTI CH IN
IN
iPod
RS-232C
FRONT
A
RL
CENTE
OPTICAL
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
1
IN (TV/
)
SAT
2
IN (BD)
3
IN (
DVR/
)
VCR 1
4
IN (
)
CD-R
1
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
1
IN (
DVD/
)
LD
(CD)
2
IN
COAXIAL
IN
XM
4
2
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
41
HDMI
1
IN
2
IN
3
IN
4
IN
OUT
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
CONTROL
IN
OUT
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
)
LD
B
P
P
R
2
IN
Y
(BD)
B
P
P
R
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
IN IN
(
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
(
1
DVD/LD
(BD)
2
ASSIGN­ABLE
VIDEO/GAME
FM UNBAL 75
IR
OUT
MONI­TOR OUT
)
21
OUT
Y
B
P
P
R
3
IN
Y
B
P
P
R
1)
31
S-VIDEO
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
MONI­TOR OUT
1
IN
2
IN
VIDEO AUDIO
ANTENNA
AM LOOP
ZONE2ZONE2
R
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
BD IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO / GAME 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
R L
AM loop antenna
1 Assemble the stand as shown in the illustration.
fig. A fig. B fig. C
• Bend the stand in the direction indicated (fig. A).
• Clip the loop into the stand (fig. B).
• It’s possible to fix the AM antenna to a wall (fig. C). Before fixing, make sure that the reception is satisfactory.
2 Pull off the protective shields of both AM antenna wires.
3 Press the
AM LOOP
antenna terminal tabs to open
and insert one wire into each terminal.
4 Release the tabs to secure the AM antenna wires.
5 Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and point in the direction giving the best reception.
Avoid placing near computers, television sets or other electrical appliances and do not let it come into contact with metal objects.
1
Note
1 Do not use any antennas other than the supplied AM loop antenna.
21
En
Page 22
03
Connecting your equipment
FM wire antenna
• Connect the FM wire antenna to the FM UNBAL 75 in the same way as the AM antenna.
For best results, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled up.
Connecting external antennas
To improve FM reception connect an external FM antenna to the FM UNBAL 75 Ω.
75 coaxial cable
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75
To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m (15 ft. to 18 ft.) length of vinyl-coated wire to the AM LOOP terminals without disconnecting the supplied AM loop antenna.
For the best possible reception, suspend horizontally outdoors.
Outdoor antenna
AM LOOP
Indoor antenna
(vinyl-coated wire)
Plugging in the receiver
Only plug in after you have connected all your components to this receiver, including the speakers.
• Plug the AC power cord into a convenient AC power outlet.
Caution
• Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord, and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet, as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on the power cord or pinch the cord in any other way. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables. The power cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electric shock. Check the power cord once in a while. If you find it damaged, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company for a replacement.
• The receiver should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular use, e.g., when on vacation.
• Make sure the blue STANDBY/ON light has gone out before unplugging.
AC outlet
Power supplied through this outlet is turned on and off by the receiver's power switch. Total electrical power consumption of connected equipment should not exceed 100 W (0.8 A).
22
En
FM UNBAL 75
AM LOOP
ANTENNA
5 m to 6 m
(15 ft. to 18 ft.)
Caution
Do not connect a TV set, monitor, heater, or similar appliance to this unit’s AC outlet.
• Do not connect appliances with high power consumption to the AC outlet in order to avoid overheating and fire risk. This can also cause the receiver to malfunction.
• Since a subwoofer or power amplifier can exceed the 100 W maximum when playing sources at a high volume, this type of equipment should not be connected to the AC outlet.
Page 23
Controls and displays
Chapter 4:
Controls and displays
Front panel
Illustration shows the VSX-94TXH front panel
1 624 7583
STANDBY/ON
04
VSX-94TXH
ADVANCED
PHASE
MCACC
PHASE
AUTO SURR/
MCACC
STREAM DIRECT
POSITION
SELECTOR
CONTROL
INPUT
CONTROL
910 11 12 13
PARAMETER
AUDIO VIDEO
(TUNE)
PHONES
(ST) (ST)
ENTER
(TUNE)
SETUP
RETURN
DIGITAL PRECISION
PROCESSING
14
TUNER EDITSPEAKERS BAND
MCACC
USB
SETUP MIC
DIGITAL VIDEO
SCALER HDMI
HOME
STANDARD
ADVANCED
THX
SURROUND
SURROUND
15 16 17 18
MULTI – ZONE & SOURCE/REC SEL
CONTROL ON/OFF
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO L RAUDIO
SIGNAL SELECT
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
SB ch
PROCESSING
STEREO/ F.S.SURR
MASTER VOLUME
23 2521 22 2419 20
1
INPUT SELECTOR
Use to select an input source.
2
STANDBY/ON
Switches the receiver between on and standby. Power indicator lights when the receiver is on.
3
PHASE CONTROL – Press to switch on/off Phase
Control or Full Band Phase Control (page 10). MCACC POSITION – Press to switch between
MCACC presets (page 31). AUTO SURR/STREAM DIRECT
Surround ( listening.
dial
page 28
) or Stream Direct
Press to select Auto
(page 30)
4 Remote sensor
Receives the signals from the remote control (see Operating range of remote control unit on page 24).
5 Character display
See Display on page 25.
6
PHASE CONTROL
indicator
– Lights to indicate Phase Control or Full Band Phase Control is selected (page 10). ADVANCED MCACC indicator – Lights when one of
the MCACC presets (page 31) is selected.
1
Digital Precision Processing indicator – Lights to indicate digital processing (for example, it disappears when Pure Direct (page 30) is on, or when listening through the multichannel analog inputs).
Note
1 The MCACC indicator does not light when the MCACC preset memory currently being selected has not been corrected with Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional or when EQ is set to OFF in the Audio parameter menu (see Setting the Audio options on page 71).
23
En
Page 24
04
Controls and displays
DIGITAL VIDEO SCALER
Resolution is set to a setting other than PURE (for example, when the video input signal is upscaled) (page 71).
HDMI indicator – Blinks when connecting an HDMI­equipped component; lights when the component is connected (page 55).
7 Listening mode buttons
HOME THX – Press to select a Home THX listening
mode (page 29). STANDARD SURROUND – Press for Standard
decoding and to switch between the various 2 Pro Logic IIx and Neo:6 options (page 28).
ADVANCED SURROUND – Use to switch between the various surround modes (page 29).
8
MASTER VOLUME
9 Front panel controls
To access the front panel controls, push gently on the lower third portion of the panel with your finger.
10
SPEAKERS
Use to change the speaker system (page 57).
11
AUDIO PARAMETER
Use to access the Audio options (page 71).
12
VIDEO PARAMETER
Use to access the Video options (page 72).
13
TUNER EDIT
Use with / to memorize and name stations for recall (page 35).
14 BAND
Switches between AM and FM radio bands (page 34).
15 MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE/REC SEL controls
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see MULTI­ZONE listening on page 59) use these controls to control the sub zone from the main zone (see Using the MULTI­ZONE controls on page 60).
You will also need to use the REC SEL controls when recording a source (see Making an audio or a video recording on page 73).
16 SIGNAL SELECT
Use to select an input signal (page 31).
dial
indicator
– Lights when
17
SBch PROCESSING
Selects the surround back channel mode (page 32) or virtual surround back mode (page 32).
18
STEREO/F.S.SURR
Switches between the stereo playback mode (page 30) and the Front Stage Surround Advance mode (page 30).
19
PHONES
Use to connect headphones. When the headphones are connected, there is no sound output from the speakers.
20
SETUP
Press to access the System Setup menu (see page 36).
21
 (TUNE/ST
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround sound system (see page 36). Use the TUNE / buttons to find radio frequencies and use ST / to find preset stations (page 35).
22
RETURN
Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen.
23
USB
Connect a USB audio device for playback. See the separate manual for HOME MEDIA GALLERY.
24
MCACC SETUP MIC
Use to connect the supplied microphone.
25
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
See Connecting a component to the front panel inputs on page 18.
jack
interface
) /
ENTER
(VSX-94TXH only)
jack
Operating range of remote control unit
The remote control may not work properly if:
• There are obstacles between the remote control and the receiver’s remote sensor.
• Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the remote sensor.
• The receiver is located near a device that is emitting infrared rays.
• The receiver is operated simultaneously with another infrared remote control unit.
30
30
7 m (23 ft.)
24
En
Page 25
Controls and displays
Display
04
1
SIGNAL
AUTO
PCM
HDMI
DIGITAL
ANALOG
STREAM DIRECT
PRO LOGIC
2
ADV.SURROUND
THX STEREO
AB
SP
indicators
21 3 8765 10 11 12 13
2
L C R
SL S SR
SBL SB
LFE
N
eo
STANDARD
SLEEP
16
DIGITAL
WMA9 Pro
DTS
AAC
CD
CD-R
DSD
SBR
: 6
4 9
FULL BAND
2
HD
MULTI-ZONE
PCM
S.RTRV
TUNER PHONO iPod
SIRIUS
Light to indicate the currently selected input signal. AUTO lights when the receiver is set to select the input signal automatically (page 31).
2 Program format indicators
These change according to which channels are active in digital sources.
L – Left front channel C – Center channel R – Right front channel SL – Left surround channel S – Surround channel (mono) SR – Right surround channel SBL – Left surround back channel SB – Surround back channel (mono) SBR – Right surround back channel LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the ((( ))) indicators light when
an LFE signal is being input)
3 Digital format indicators
Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding format is detected (
DSDPCM
lights during DSD (Digital Stream
Direct) to PCM conversion with SACDs).
4
S.RTRV
Lights when the Sound Retriever is switched on and/or
ANALOG ATT (page 74)
5
MULTI-ZONE
.
(page 71)
Lights when the MULTI-ZONE feature is active (page 59).
6
FULL BAND
Lights when the Full Band Phase Control is switched on (page 10).
7
PHASE CONTROL
Lights when the Phase Control or Full Band Phase Control is switched on (page 10).
8 Sound processing indicators
Light according to the active Audio parameter(s) and/or ANALOG ATT (page 74)
9
V.SB
.
Lights during Virtual surround back processing
10
TUNER
indicators
(page 71)
(page 32)
TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being received.
PHASE CONTROL
DIALOG E
SOUND
Hi-Bit/Sampling
DVD
BDP
191514 17 2018
ATT
TV
DVR
DNR
OVER
V.S B
VIDEO
HDMI
TUNED
STEREO
MONO
HMG [ 1 ]
RDS EON
USB
[ 2 ]
[ 3 ]
dB
SR+
XM
[ 4 ]
STEREO – Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being received in auto stereo mode.
MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set using the MPX button.
11
SOUND
Lights when any of the Midnight, Loudness or tone controls feature is selected (page 71).
12 Master volume level
Shows the overall volume level. –80dB indicates the minimum level, and +12dB indicates the maximum level.
13
SR+
Lights when the SR+ mode is switched on (page 63).
14
STREAM DIRECT
Lights when Direct/Pure Direct is selected (page 30).
15 Speaker indicators
Lights to indicate the current speaker system, A and/or B (page 57).
16 Listening mode indicators
THX – Lights when one of the Home THX modes is
selected. ADV.SURROUND – Lights when one of the
Advanced Surround modes has been selected. STEREO – Lights when stereo listening is switched
on (see Listening in stereo on page 30). STANDARD – Lights when one of the Standard
Surround modes is switched on (see Listening in surround sound on page 28).
17
SLEEP
Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page 74).
18 Matrix decoding format indicators
2PRO LOGIC IIx – This lights to indicate 2 Pro Logic II / 2 Pro Logic IIx decoding (page 28).
Neo:6
When one of the Neo:6 modes of the receiver
is on, this lights to indicate Neo:6 processing
19 Character display
.
Displays various system information.
20 Input source indicators
Light to indicate the input source you have selected.
(page 28)
.
25
En
Page 26
04
Controls and displays
Remote control
Illustration shows the VSX-94TXH remote control
TUNE
ENTER
TUNE
REC
T.DISP
SYSTEM OFF
XM RADIO
BD TV CTRL
ZONE2/3
SIRIUS
TUNER
RECEIVER
DIMMER
GENRE
CLASS
CH
ENTER
LEVEL
V PARAMETER MENU T.EDIT
TV CH
VOL
INFO
MUTE
REC STOP
MEMORY
HDD
DVD
CH
CH
STEREO/
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
HDMI
RETURN
ANALOG ATT
DISC
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
1
SELECT
2
CD
CD-R
DVD TV
HOME MEDIA
DVR2
DVR1
SLEEP
SR
GALLERY
i Pod
+
3
4
D.ACCESS
CLEAR +
10
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU
5 6
7
8
9
10
11
BAND
SETUP
PROGRAM
CATEGORY
TV VOL
ANT
MPX
AUDIO SUBTITLE
STATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
ST ST
GUIDE
TV CONTROL
INPUT
SELECT
DISP
PHOTO
SIGNAL SEL
THX
PHASE
RECEIVER
The remote has been conveniently color-coded according to component control using the following system (press the corresponding input source button to access):
Green – Receiver controls (see below)
Red – DVD controls (page 81)
Blue – Tuner, XM and SIRIUS Radio controls (page 34, 51, 53)
Yellow – iPod controls (page 50)
White – Other controls (page 81)
1
RECEIVER
This switches between standby and on for this receiver.
2 INPUT SELECT Use to select the input source (use SHIFT for INPUT SELECT ).
3 Input source buttons
Press to select control of other components (see Controlling the rest of your system on page 77).
4 Number buttons and other receiver/component controls
Use the number buttons to directly select a radio frequency (page 34) or the tracks on a CD, DVD, etc.
DISC (ENTER) can be used to enter commands for TV or DTV, and also to select a disc in a multi-CD player.
Press RECEIVER first to access:
SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and select the amount of time before sleep (page 74).
DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display (page 74). ANALOG ATT – Attenuates (lowers) the level of an
analog input signal to prevent distortion (page 74).
SR+ – Switches the SR+ mode on/off (page 63). GENRE – Automatically selects the most appropriate
Advanced Surround mode for the genre of the source currently being played back (this feature is available only when a Pioneer DVD recorder supporting HDMI Control is connected to this receiver via HDMI) (page 33).
CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a channel, then use / to adjust the level (page 48).
Press TUNER first to access:
D.ACCESS – After pressing, you can access a radio station directly using the number buttons (page 34).
CLASS – Switches between the three banks (classes) of radio station presets (page 35).
5 Tuner/component control buttons/
SETUP
These button controls can be accessed after you have selected the corresponding input source button (DVD, DVR1, TV, etc.). The BAND and T.EDIT tuner controls are explained on page 34 and page 35. Press RECEIVER first to access the following controls:
A PARAMETER – Use to access the Audio options (page 71).
V PARAMETER – Use to access the Video options (page 72).
SETUP – Use to access the System Setup menu (page 36).
RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen (also use to return to the previous menu with DVDs or to select closed captioning with DTV).
6

(TUNE/ST) /
ENTER
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround sound system (see page 36) and the Audio or Video options (page 71 or 72). Also used to control DVD menus/ options and for deck 1 of a double cassette deck player. Use the TUNE / buttons to find radio frequencies and use ST / to find preset stations (page 35).
26
En
Page 27
Controls and displays
04
7
TV CONTROL
These buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV CTRL button. Thus if you only have one TV to hook up to this system assign it to the TV CTRL input source button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the TV
CTRL button (see page 77 for more on this).
TV – Use to turn on/off the power of the TV. TV VOL +/– – Use to adjust the volume on your TV. INPUT SELECT – Use to select the TV input signal. TV CH +/– – Use to select channels.
8 Component control buttons
The main buttons (, , etc.) are used to control a component after you have selected it using the input source buttons.
The controls above these buttons can be accessed after you have selected the corresponding input source button (for example DVD, DVR1 or TV). The following controls can be accessed when listening to the built-in tuner:
MPX – Switches between stereo and mono reception of FM broadcasts. If the signal is weak then switching to mono will improve the sound quality (page 34).
DISP – Switches between named station presets and radio frequencies (page 35).
9
STATUS
Press to check selected receiver settings (page 75).
10
MULTI OPE
Use this button to perform multi operations (page 79).
11
SHIFT
Press to access the controls outlined in white boxes (for example, INPUT SELECT ), or to display the currently selected input source in the remote control LCD.
12
SOURCE
Press to turn on/off other components connected to the receiver (see page 77 for more on this).
13 Character display (LCD)
This display shows information when transmitting control signals.
The following commands are shown when you’re setting the remote to control other components (see Controlling the rest of your system on page 77):
SETUP – Indicates the setup mode, from which you choose the options below.
PRESET – See Selecting preset codes directly on page 77.
LEARNINGSee Programming signals from other remote controls on page 77.
MULTI OP – See Multi Operation and System Off on page 79.
SYS OFF – See Multi Operation and System Off on page 79.
buttons
DIRECT F – See Direct function on page 79. RENAME – See Renaming input source names on
page 79.
ERASE – See Erasing one of the remote control button settings on page 78.
RESET – See Resetting the remote control presets on page 78.
READ ID – See Confirming preset codes on page 78.
14
RECEIVER
Switches the remote to control the receiver (used to select the green commands above the number buttons (ANALOG ATT, etc.). Also use this button to set up surround sound (page 8, page 36). With SHIFT, this selects the MULTI-ZONE control (page 59), shown in the display as RCV/Z2, RCV/Z3.
15
VOL +/–
Use to set the listening volume.
16
MUTE
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).
17 Receiver controls
SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal (page 31). SBch – Use to select the surround/virtual back
channel mode (page 32). STEREO/F.S.SURR – Switches between the stereo
playback mode (page 30) and the Front Stage Surround Advance mode (page 30).
THX – Press to select a Home THX listening mode (page 29).
STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding and to switch between the various 2 Pro Logic IIx and Neo:6 options (page 28).
ADV.SURR – Use to switch between the various surround modes (page 29).
18
PHASE – Press to switch on/off Phase Control or Full
Band Phase Control (page 10). MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC presets (page 31).
S.DIRECT – Press to select Auto Surround (page 28) or Stream Direct (page 30) listening.
27
En
Page 28
05
T.DISP
PHOTO
T.DISP
STEREO/
PHOTO
Listening to your system
Chapter 5:
Listening to your system
Important
• The listening modes and many features described in this section may not be available depending on the current source, settings and status of the receiver. See Listening modes with different input signal formats on page 93 for more on this.
Auto playback
There are many ways to listen back to sources using this receiver, but for the simplest, most direct listening option is the Auto Surround feature. The receiver automatically detects what kind of source you’re playing and selects
multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.
STEREO/
SIGNAL SEL
STATUSSTATUS
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
THX
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
MCACC S.DIRECT
PHASE
RECEIVER
• While listening to a source, press SURR
/
STREAM DIRECT
)2 for auto playback of a source.
AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the display before
showing the decoding or playback format. Check the digital format indicators in the front panel display to see
how the source is being processed.
3
• When listening to XM Radio, the XM HD Surround feature is selected automatically (see Using XM HD Surround on page 52 for more on this), and also when listening to the FM Radio, the Neural THX feature is selected automatically (see Using Neural THX on page 34 for more on this).
1
S.DIRECT (AUTO
Listening in surround sound
Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in surround sound. However, the options available will depend on your speaker setup and the type of source you’re listening to.
If you connected surround back speakers, see also Using surround back channel processing on page 32.
Standard surround sound
The following modes provide basic surround sound for stereo and multichannel sources.
SIGNAL SEL
STATUSSTATUS
THX
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
PHASE
RECEIVER
• While listening to a source, press STANDARD SURROUND
(
If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listening mode.
• If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround encoded, the proper decoding format will
automatically be selected and shows in the display.
With two channel sources, you can select from:
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel sound, especially suited to movie sources
2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel sound, especially suited to music sources
2 Pro Logic IIx GAME– Up to 7.1 channel sound, especially suited to video games
2 PRO LOGIC – 4.1 channel surround sound (sound from the surround speakers is mono)
Neo:6 CINEMA – 6.1 channel sound, especially suited to movie sources
Neo:6 MUSIC – 6.1 channel sound, especially suited to music sources
7
STANDARD
).
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
MCACC S.DIRECT
4
STANDARD
6
5
28
En
Note
1 • Stereo surround (matrix) formats are decoded accordingly using Neo:6 CINEMA or 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE (see Listening in surround sound above for more on these decoding formats).
• The Auto Surround feature is canceled if you connect headphones or select the multichannel analog inputs. 2 For more options using this button, see Using Stream Direct on page 30. 3 VSX-94TXH only – Neural THX is selected when Neural Radio is accessed with the HOME MEDIA GALLERY input. However, Stereo is selected when a category other than Neural Radio is accessed. 4 In modes that give 6.1 channel sound, the same signal is heard from both surround back speakers. 5 If surround back channel processing (page 32) is switched OFF, or the surround back speakers are set to NO (this happens automatically if the Surround back speaker setting on page 39 is set to anything but Normal (default)), 2 Pro Logic IIx becomes 2 Pro Logic II (5.1 channel sound). 6 When listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are three further parameters you can adjust: Center Width, Dimension, and Panorama. See Setting the Audio options on page 71 to adjust them. 7 When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Music mode, you can also adjust the center image effect (see Setting the Audio options on page 71).
Page 29
Listening to your system
T.DISP
PHOTO
T.DISP
PHOTO
05
Neural THX – Up to 7.1 channel sound, especially suited to music sources
1
XM HD Surround – Up to 7.1 channel sound, especially suited to music sources
2
With multichannel sources, if you have connected surround back speaker(s) and have selected SBch ON, you
can select (according to format):
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above (only available when you’re using two surround back speakers)
2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See above
Dolby Digital EX – Creates surround back channel sound for 5.1 channel sources and provides pure decoding for 6.1 channel sources (like Dolby Digital Surround EX)
DTS-ES – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback with DTS-ES encoded sources
DTS Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback with DTS encoded sources
Using the Home THX modes
THX and Home THX are technical standards created by THX Ltd. for cinema and home theater sound. Home THX is designed to make home theater audio sound more like what you hear in a cinema.
Different THX options will be available depending on the source and the setting for surround back channel processing (see Using surround back channel processing
With multichannel sources, press THX
(
HOME THX)
repeatedly to select from:
THX CINEMA – Gives you cinema-quality sound from your home theatre system using all the speakers in your setup
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX – Especially suited to movie sources, this allows you to hear 7.1 channel playback with 5.1 channel sources
THX Surround EX – Allows you to hear 6.1 or 7.1 channel playback with 5.1 channel sources
THX Select2 CINEMA – Allows you to hear 7.1 channel playback with 5.1 channel sources
THX MUSICMODE – Allows you to hear 7.1 channel playback with 5.1 channel sources
THX GAMES MODE – Allows you to hear 7.1 channel playback from the output of a video game console
Using the Advanced surround effects
The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety of additional surround sound effects. Most Advanced Surround modes are designed to be used with film soundtracks, but some modes are also suited for music sources. Try different settings with various soundtracks to see which you like.
STEREO/
SIGNAL SEL
STATUSSTATUS
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
THX
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
MCACC S.DIRECT
PHASE
on page 32 for more on this).
STEREO/
SIGNAL SEL
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
THX
PHASE
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
•Press
ADV.SURR (ADVANCED SURROUND
repeatedly to select a listening mode.
RECEIVER
4
ACTION – Designed for action movies with dynamic
RECEIVER
•Press
THX (HOME THX
) to select a listening mode.
With two channel sources, press THX (HOME THX) repeatedly to select a matrix-decoding process for the THX CINEMA mode (see Listening in surround sound above for an explanation of each process):
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
THX GAMES MODE
3
soundtracks
DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of dialog
SCI-FI – Designed for science fiction with lots of special effects
MONOFILM – Creates surround sound from mono soundtracks
ENT.SHOW – Suitable for musical sources
EXPANDED – Creates an extra wide stereo field
TV SURROUND – Provides surround sound for both mono and stereo TV sources
ADVANCED GAME – Suitable for video games
Note
1 Neural THX can be selected with the FM input. Also, Neural THX can be selected with the HOME MEDIA GALLERY input (VSX-94TXH only). 2 XM HD Surround can be selected only with the XM input. 3 • If you only have one surround back speaker connected, 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX, THX Select2 CINEMA, THX MUSICMODE and THX GAMES MODE are not available. With 2-channel input signals, however, 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX can be selected.
• You can’t use the THX modes when headphones are connected. 4 • Depending on the source and the sound mode you have selected, you may not get sound from the surround back speakers in your setup. For more on this, refer to Using surround back channel processing on page 32.
• If you press ADV.SURR when the headphones are connected, the PHONES SURR. mode will automatically be selected. 5 Use with Dolby Pro Logic for a stereo surround effect (stereo field is wider than Standard modes with Dolby Digital sources).
)
5
29
En
Page 30
05
T.DISP
PHOTO
T.DISP
PHOTO
T.DISP
PHOTO
Listening to your system
SPORTS – Suitable for sports programs
CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-type sound
ROCK/POP – Creates a live concert sound for rock and/or pop music
UNPLUGGED – Suitable for acoustic music sources
EXT.STEREO – Gives multichannel sound to a stereo source, using all of your speakers
PHONES SURR. – When listening through headphones, you can still get the effect of overall surround.
Using Front Stage Surround Advance
The Front Stage Surround Advance function allows you to create natural surround sound effects using just the front speakers and the subwoofer.
STEREO/
SIGNAL SEL
STATUSSTATUS
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
THX
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
MCACC S.DIRECT
PHASE
RECEIVER
Tip
• When an Advanced Surround listening mode is selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options on page 71.
Listening in stereo
When you select STEREO, you will hear the source through just the front left and right speakers (and possibly your subwoofer depending on your speaker settings). Dolby Digital, DTS and WMA9 Pro multichannel sources are downmixed to stereo.
STEREO/
SIGNAL SEL
STATUSSTATUS
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
THX
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
MCACC S.DIRECT
PHASE
RECEIVER
• While listening to a source, press for stereo playback.
Press repeatedly to switch between:
STEREO – The audio is heard with your surround settings and you can still use the Midnight, Loudness, and Tone functions.
F.S.SURR FOCUS – See Using Front Stage Surround Advance below for more on this.
F.S.SURR WIDE – See Using Front Stage Surround Advance below for more on this.
STEREO/F.S.SURR
• While listening to a source, press
STEREO/F.S.SURR
to select Front Stage Surround Advance modes.
STEREO – See Listening in stereo above for more on this.
F.S.SURR FOCUS – Use to provide a rich surround sound effect directed to the center of where the front left and right speakers sound projection area converges.
F.S.SURR WIDE – Use to provide a surround sound effect to a wider area than FOCUS mode.
FOCUS position (Recommend)
Front left
speaker
Front right
speaker
WIDE position
Front left
speaker
1
Front right
speaker
Using Stream Direct
Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the truest possible reproduction of a source. All unnecessary signal processing is bypassed, and you’re left with the pure analog or digital sound source (see Stream direct with different input signal formats on page 96).
STEREO/
SIGNAL SEL
STATUSSTATUS
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
THX
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
MCACC S.DIRECT
PHASE
30
En
RECEIVER
1 While listening to a source, press S.DIRECT
/
STREAM DIRECT) to select the mode you want.
SURR
Check the digital format indicators in the front panel display to see how the source is being processed.
Note
1 When using F.S.SURR WIDE, a better effect can be obtained if Auto MCACC Setup is performed. For more on this, refer to Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8.
(
AUTO
Page 31
Listening to your system
T.DISP
PHOTO
CH
CH
DISP
AUTO SURROUND – See Auto playback on page 28.
DIRECT – Sources are heard according to the settings made in the Surround Setup (speaker setting, channel level, speaker distance, acoustic calibration EQ, and X-curve), as well as with dual mono, the input attenuator, and any sound delay and hi-bit/hi-sampling settings. You will hear sources according to the number of channels in the signal.
PURE DIRECT – Analog and PCM sources are heard without any digital processing.
from the Speaker B in this mode.
1
No sound is output
Choosing the input signal
You need to hook up a component to both analog and digital inputs on the receiver to select between input
4
signals.
T.DISP
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
PHOTO
SIGNAL SEL
THX
PHASE
RECEIVER
STEREO/
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
05
Selecting MCACC presets
• Default setting: MEMORY 1
If you have calibrated your system for different listening positions
kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).
• While listening to a source, press POSITION
Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC presets3 or to switch calibration off. See Data Management on page 45 to check and manage your current settings.
2
, you can switch between settings to suit the
STEREO/
SIGNAL SEL
STATUSSTATUS
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
THX
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
MCACC S.DIRECT
PHASE
RECEIVER
MCACC (MCACC
).
•Press
SIGNAL SEL (SIGNAL SELECT
) to select the
input signal corresponding to the source component.
Each press cycles through the options as follows:
AUTO – This is the default setting. The receiver selects the first available signal in the following order: HDMI; DIGITAL; ANALOG.
ANALOG – Selects an analog signal.
DIGITAL – Selects an optical or coaxial digital signal.
HDMI – Selects an HDMI signal.
5
PCM – Only PCM signals are output.6 The receiver selects the first available signal in the following order: HDMI; DIGITAL.
When set to DIGITAL or AUTO, 2 DIGITAL lights with Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital Plus decoding, 2 HD lights with Dolby TrueHD decoding, DTS lights with DTS or DTS-HD decoding, and WMA9 Pro lights to indicate that a WMA9 Pro signal is being decoded.
Note
1 There are cases where a brief noise is heard before playback of sources other than PCM. Please select AUTO SURROUND or DIRECT if this is a problem. 2 Different presets might also have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system. These presets can be set in Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 36, either of which you should have already completed. 3 • You can’t use these settings when MULTI CH IN is switched on, and they has no effect when headphones are connected.
• You can also press / to select the MCACC preset. 4 • This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), DTS (including DTS 96 kHz / 24 bit) and WMA9 Pro digital signal formats. With other digital signal formats, set to ANALOG (the MULTI CH IN, TUNER, PHONO and iPod input functions are all fixed to ANALOG).
• You may get digital noise when a LD or CD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal. To prevent noise, make the proper digital connections (page 17) and set the signal input to DIGITAL.
• Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals. For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with your DVD player. 5 When the HDMI option in Setting the Audio options on page 71 is set to THROUGH, the sound will be heard through your TV, not from this receiver. 6 • This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before AUTO recognizes the PCM signal on a CD, for instance.
• When PCM is selected, noise may be output during playback of non-PCM sources. Please select another input signal if this is a problem.
31
En
Page 32
05
Listening to your system
SBch AUTO – Automatically switches to 6.1 or 7.1
Using surround back channel processing
•Default setting: SBch ON
You can have the receiver automatically use 6.1 or 7.1 decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES), or you can choose to always use
6.1 or 7.1 decoding (for example, with 5.1 encoded material). With 5.1 encoded sources, a surround back channel will be generated, but the material may sound better in the 5.1 format for which it was originally encoded (in which case, you can simply switch surround back channel processing off).
The table below indicates when you will hear the surround back channel when playing various kinds of sources ( speaker(s)).
• Press the surround back channel options.
Each press cycles through the options as follows:
Type of source
Dolby Digital EX/DTS-ES 5.1 ch sources with
6.1 ch flagged
Dolby Digital/DTS and DVD-Audio 5.1 ch sources
Dolby Digital/DTS/PCM and DVD-Audio stereo sources
Analog 2-channel (stereo) sources ON
DTS-HD Master Audio/DTS-HD/Dolby Digital Plus/Dolby TrueHD/WMA9 Pro encoded and PCM 6.1 ch/7.1 ch sources
Dolby Digital Plus/Dolby TrueHD/WMA9 Pro (44.1 kHz/48 kHz) encoded and PCM 5.1 ch sources
=Sound plays through surround back
T.DISP
PHOTO
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
SBch
(SBch PROCESSING) repeatedly to cycle
SIGNAL SEL
THX
PHASE
RECEIVER
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
STEREO/
SBch ON – 6.1 or 7.1 decoding is always used (for example, a surround back channel will be generated for 5.1 encoded material)
SBch
Processing /
Virtual SB
mode
ON
AUTO
ON
AUTO
ON
AUTO
AUTO
ON
AUTO
ON
AUTO
Multichannel
sources
c
c
decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES)
SBch OFF – Maximum 5.1 playback
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode
When you’re not using surround back speakers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround back channel through your surround speakers. You can choose to listen to sources with no surround back channel information, or if the material sounds better in the format (for example, 5.1) for which it was originally encoded, you can have the receiver only apply this effect
to 6.1 encoded sources like Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES. The table indicates when you will hear the virtual
surround back channel ( channel is active).
• Press the virtual surround back channel options.
Each press cycles through the options as follows:
VirtualSB ON – Virtual Surround Back is always used (for example, on 5.1 encoded material)
VirtualSB AUTO – Virtual Surround Back is automatically applied to 6.1 encoded sources (for example, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES)
VirtualSB OFF – Virtual Surround Back mode is switched off
2 Pro Logic II x 2 Pro Logic Neo:6
=Virtual surround back
SBch
(SBch PROCESSING) repeatedly to cycle
Standard / THX
Stereo sources
a
b
a
b




Advanced
surround
d
d
d
d
1
32
En
Note
1 • You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the THX, stereo, Front Stage Surround Advance or Stream Direct mode is selected.
• You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the Surr Back setting is set to NO in the Speaker Setting on
page 47.
• The Virtual Surround Back mode cannot be applied to sources that do not have surround channel information.
Page 33
Listening to your system
05
SBch
Type of source
DTS-HD Master Audio/DTS-HD/ DTS-EXPRESS/WMA9 Pro (88.2 kHz/96 kHz) encoded 5.1 ch sources
Dolby Digital Plus/Dolby TrueHD/WMA9 Pro (44.1 kHz/48 kHz) encoded stereo sources
Processing /
Virtual SB
mode
ON
AUTO
Multichannel
sources
c
c
ON
AUTO
DTS-HD Master Audio/DTS-HD/ DTS-EXPRESS/WMA9 Pro (88.2 kHz/96 kHz) encoded stereo sources
a. Only applicable when using the Virtual Surround Back mode. b.Not applicable when using the Virtual Surround Back mode. c. Sound is output from the surround back speakers only when THX Select2 CINEMA, THX MUSICMODE or THX GAMES MODE is selected. d.Advanced surround mode may not be available depending on the input signal.
ON
AUTO
Standard / THX
Stereo sources
2 Pro Logic II x 2 Pro Logic Neo:6
a
b
Using the genre synchronizing function
This feature automatically selects the most appropriate Advanced Surround mode for the source currently being played back on a Pioneer DVD recorder supporting HDMI
Control connected to this receiver via HDMI. on HDMI Control, see About HDMI on page 56.
CD
CD-R
XM RADIO
GALLERY
+
BD TV CTRL
SIRIUS
TUNER
DIMMER
GENRE
HDMI
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
ANALOG ATT
DVD TV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
SLEEP
SR
HOME MEDIA
1
For details
Advanced
surround
d
d
d
d
•Press
RECEIVER
, and then press
GENRE
while the
source assigned to a genre is being played back.
The most appropriate Advanced Surround mode for the source being played back is automatically selected.
Note
1 • This feature is available only when the source being played back is assigned to a genre. When the source has no genre assigned to, NO GENRE appears showing that this feature is not available.
• Make sure that HDMI Control is set to ON. When OFF is selected, CANNOT SELECT appears showing that this feature is not available (see About HDMI
on page 56).
33
En
Page 34
06
Using the tuner
Chapter 6:
Using the tuner
Listening to the radio
The following steps show you how to tune in to FM and AM radio broadcasts using the automatic (search) and manual (step) tuning functions. If you already know the frequency of the station you want, see Tuning directly to a station below. Once you are tuned to a station you can memorize the frequency for recall later—see Saving station presets on page 35 for more on how to do this.
INFO
REC
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
XM RADIO
DVD TV
BD TV CTRL
HOME MEDIA
DVR2
SIRIUS
GALLERY
DVR1 i Pod
TUNER
SLEEP
DIMMER
1 Press the
2Use the
SYSTEM OFF
HDMI
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
TUNER
BAND
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER TOP MENU
BAND
SETUPSETUP
PROGRAM
CATEGORY
TV VOL
ANT
ANALOG
button to select the tuner.
button to change the band (FM or
CLEAR +
10
TUNE
ST ST
ENTER
TUNE
GUIDE
TV CONTROL
INPUT
SELECT
REC
CLASS
CH
ENTER
LEVEL
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
RETURNRETURN
TV CH
VOL
INFO
AM), if necessary.
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.
3 Tune to a station.
There are three ways to do this:
Automatic tuning
To search for stations in the currently selected band, press and hold TUNE / for about a second. The receiver will start searching for the next station, stopping when it has found one. Repeat to search for other stations.
Manual tuning
To change the frequency one step at a time, press
TUNE /.
High speed tuning
Press and hold TUNE / for high speed tuning. Release the button at the frequency you want.
ANT
DISC
MPX
AUDIO SUBTITLE
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
PHOTO
DISP
SIGNAL SEL
THX
PHASE
REC STOP
HDD
CH
T.DISP
SBch
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
MUTE
MEMORY
DVD
CH
STEREO/ F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
Using Neural THX
This feature uses Neural Surround™ technology to achieve optimal surround sound from FM radio.
• While listening to FM radio, press S.DIRECT for Neural THX listening.
See About Neural Surround on page 92 for more on this. The Neural THX mode can be selected also with the
STANDARD button.
Tuning directly to a station
Sometimes, you’ll already know the frequency of the station you want to listen to. In this case, you can simply enter the frequency directly using the number buttons on the remote control.
1 Press the
2Use the AM), if necessary.
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.
3 Press
4 Use the number buttons to enter the frequency of the radio station.
For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1, 0, 6, 0, 0. If you make a mistake halfway through, press D.ACCESS
twice to cancel the frequency and start over.
TUNER
BAND
D.ACCESS
button to select the tuner.
button to change the band (FM or
(Direct Access).
34
En
Improving FM stereo sound
If the TUNED or STEREO indicators don’t light when tuning to an FM station because the signal is weak, press the MPX button to switch the receiver into mono reception mode. This should improve the sound quality and allow you to enjoy the broadcast.
Page 35
Using the tuner
06
Saving station presets
If you often listen to a particular radio station, it’s convenient to have the receiver store the frequency for easy recall whenever you want to listen to that station. This saves the effort of manually tuning in each time. This receiver can memorize up to 30 stations, stored in three banks, or classes (A, B and C) of 10 stations each. When saving an FM frequency, the MPX setting (see page 34) is also stored.
DISP
SIGNAL SEL
THX
PHASE
RECEIVER
REC STOP
HDD
CH
T.DISP
SBch
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
MUTE
MEMORY
DVD
CH
STEREO/ F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
XM RADIO
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
SLEEP
BD TV CTRL
SIRIUS
TUNER
DIMMER
HDMI
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
DVD TV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
ANALOG
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER TOP MENU
BAND
SETUPSETUP
PROGRAM
CATEGORY
TV VOL
ANT
CLEAR +
10
TUNE
ST ST
ENTER
TUNE
GUIDE
TV CONTROL
INPUT
SELECT
REC
CLASS
CH
ENTER
LEVEL
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
RETURNRETURN
TV CH
VOL
INFO
MUTE
MPX
DISC
AUDIO SUBTITLE
PHOTO
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
1 Tune to a station you want to memorize.
See Listening to the radio on page 34 for more on this.
2Press
T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT
).
The display shows STATION MEMORY, then a blinking memory class.
3Press press ST
CLASS
to select one of the three classes then
/
to select the station preset you want.
You can also use the number buttons to select a station preset.
4Press
ENTER
.
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop blinking and the receiver stores the station.
Tip
• To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1 to 3 and input four spaces instead of a name.
• Once you have named a station preset, you can press DISP when listening to a station to switch the display between name and frequency.
Listening to station presets
You will need to have some presets stored to do this. See Saving station presets above if you haven’t done this already.
1Press
2Press is stored.
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A, B and C.
3Press ST want.
• You can also use the number buttons on the remote
TUNER
to select the tuner.
CLASS
to select the class in which the station
/
to select the station preset you
control to recall the station preset.
Naming station presets
For easier identification, you can name your station presets.
1 Choose the station preset you want to name.
See Listening to station presets below for how to do this.
2Press
The display shows STATION NAME, then a blinking cursor at the first character position.
3 Input the name you want.
Choose from the following characters for a name up to four characters long.
Use / to select a character, / to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.
T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT
).
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 0123456789
!”#$%&’()
+,–./:;<=>?@[ \ ]^_{|} ˜ [space]
35
En
Page 36
07
The System Setup menu
Chapter 7:
The System Setup menu
Surr Back System – Specifies how you are using your
Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
The following section shows you how to make detailed settings to specify how you’re using the receiver (for example, if you want to set up two speaker systems in separate rooms), and also explains how to fine-tune individual speaker system settings to your liking.
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
XM RADIO
GALLERY
BD TV CTRL
SIRIUS
TUNER
DIMMER
HDMI
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
DVD TV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
SLEEP
HOME MEDIA
ANALOG
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER TOP MENU
BAND
SETUPSETUP
PROGRAM
CATEGORY
TV VOL
ANT
GUIDE
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Use the RECEIVER button to switch on.
• If headphones are connected to the receiver, disconnect them.
2 Press the
SETUP
RECEIVER
button.
on the remote control, then press
2
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the /// buttons and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm and exit the current menu.
• Press SETUP at any time to exit the System Setup menu.
3 Select the setting you want to adjust.
DVD/LD
System Setup MENU
1. Auto MCACC
2. Surr Back System
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
5. Data Management
6. Manual SP Setup
7. Input Setup
8. Other Setup
-
:Exit
55.0
CLEAR +
10
TUNE
ST ST
ENTER
TUNE
TV CONTROL
INPUT
TV CH
SELECT
INFO
REC
dB
CH LEVEL
CLASS
ENTER
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
RETURNRETURN
VOL
1
DISC
surround back speakers (see Surround back speaker setting on page 39).
Manual MCACC – Fine-tunes your speaker settings and customize the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on page 39).
FULL BAND PHASE CTRL – Calibrates and automatically corrects the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers connected (see Full Band Phase Control on page 44).
Data Management – Checks your MCACC presets and manages them through copying, renaming or deleting (see Data Management on page 45).
Manual SP Setup – Specifies the size, number, distance and overall balance of the speakers you’ve connected (see Manual speaker setup on page 47).
Input Setup – Specifies what you’ve connected to the digital, HDMI, component video and S-video inputs (see The Input Setup menu on page 67).
Other Setup – Makes customized settings to reflect how you are using the receiver (see The Other Setup menu on page 68).
Automatic MCACC (Expert)
If your setup requires more detailed settings than those provided in Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8, you can customize your setup options below. You can calibrate your system differently for up to six different MCACC
3
presets positions depending on the type of source (for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game
close to the TV).
, which are useful if you have different listening
4
36
En
Auto MCACC – See Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8 for a quick and effective automatic surround setup. See Automatic MCACC (Expert) below for a more detailed setup.
Note
1 Make sure not to switch off the power when using the System Setup menu. 2 • Note that when editing items in the Manual MCACC menu, you will need to first specify the MCACC preset you want to adjust by pressing MCACC before pressing SETUP
• You can’t use the System Setup menu when the iPod, HOME MEDIA GALLERY (VSX-94TXH only), XM or SIRIUS Radio input source is selected (in either
the main or sub zone). When you set ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 to ON (page 60), you can’t use the System Setup menu. 3 These are stored in memory and referred to as MEMORY1–6 (or M1–6) until you rename them in Data Management on page 45. 4 You may also want to have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system.
.
Page 37
The System Setup menu
07
Important
• Make sure the microphone/speakers are not moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.
• The screen saver will automatically appear after three minutes of inactivity.
Caution
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are output at high volume.
1 Select ‘ then press
Auto MCACC ENTER
.
’ from the System Setup menu
If the System Setup screen is not displayed, refer to Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu above.
DVD/LD
System Setup MENU
1. Auto MCACC
2. Surr Back System
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
5. Data Management
6. Manual SP Setup
7. Input Setup
8. Other Setup
2 Make sure ‘ MCACC preset
DVD/LD
-
55.0
dB
1. Auto MCACC
Surr Back System [Normal (default)]
Save SYMMETRY to [M1. MEMORY 1 ]
START
:Exit
ENTER:Start :Cancel
Normal (default)
3
then select START.
’ is selected,2 select an
-
55.0
dB
4
For a fully customized Auto MCACC setup, select CUSTOM and set the following parameters using /:
DVD/LD
1. Auto MCACC
Output Setup [Normal (default)]
Save SYMMETRY to [ M1. MEMORY 1 ]
CUSTOM
ENTER:Next
: Cancel
dB
DVD/LD
1. Auto MCACC
Custom Menu ALL
Speaker Setting
Speaker Distance
EQ Pro. & S-Wave
FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
ENTER:Next
Channel Level
-
55.0
: Return
dB
DVD/LD
1. Auto MCACC
SYMMETRY
M1.MEMORY 1
ALL CH ADJ [ M2.MEMORY 2 ] FRONT ALIGN [ M3.MEMORY 3 ] THX Speaker [ NO ]
[ START ] ENTER:Start
-
: Return
55.0
-
55.0
Custom Menu – The default is ALL (recommended), but you can limit the system calibration to only one
setting (to save time) if you want. options are ALL, Keep SP SYSTEM,
6
The available
7
Speaker
Setting, Channel Level, Speaker Distance and EQ Pro. & S-Wave.
EQ Type (only available when the Custom Menu above is EQ Pro. & S-Wave) – This determines how
the frequency balance is adjusted.
After a single calibration is performed, each of the following three correction curves can be stored
1
separately in the MCACC memory. SYMMETRY (default) implements symmetric correction for each pair of left and right speakers to flatten the frequency-amplitude characteristics. ALL CH ADJUST is a ‘flat’ setting where all the speakers are set individually so no special
weighting is given to any one channel. FRONT ALIGN sets all speakers in accordance with the front speaker settings (no equalization is applied to the front left and right channels).
THX Speaker (only available when the Custom Menu above is ALL or Speaker Setting) – Select YES if you are using THX speakers (set all speakers to SMALL), otherwise leave it set to NO.
Stand.Wave Multi-Point (only available when the Custom Menu above is EQ Pro. & S-Wave) – In addition to measurements at the listening position, you can use two more reference points for which test tones will be analyzed for standing waves. This is useful if you want to get a balanced ‘flat’ calibration
for several seating positions in your listening area. Place the microphone at the reference point indicated on-screen and note the last microphone
placement will be at your main listening position:
5
dB
2nd reference
point
12
Main listening
3
position
3rd reference
point
When you’re finished settings the options, press RETURN to go back to the Auto MCACC main setup.
8
9
Note
1 Except in cases where you are only adjusting one parameter (i.e. channel level) from the CUSTOM setup screen (step 2). 2 If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room , read through Surround back speaker setting on page 39 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 3. 3 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now (you can rename it later in Data Management on page 45). 4 Note that correction curves are saved only when set to SYMMETRY. Select CUSTOM to save other correction curves (such as ALL CH ADJUST and FRONT ALIGN). 5 Select DEMO, and then press ENTER to activate the demo mode of Auto MCACC. In the demo mode, no settings are saved and no errors occur. When the speakers are connected to this receiver, the test tone is output repeatedly. Press RETURN to cancel the test tone. 6• The EQ Pro. & S-Wave measurement is also taken when ALL is selected. See Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 42 for more on this.
• Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the respective MCACC preset. For details, see
Setting the Audio options on page 71.
• The FULL BAND PHASE CTRL measurement is also taken when ALL is selected. See Full Band Phase Control on page 44. 7The Keep SP SYSTEM option allows you to calibrate your system while leaving your current speaker setting (page 47) unchanged. 8 If you selected ALL as your Custom Menu, you can specify the MCACC preset where you want to save the ALL CH ADJUST and FRONT ALIGN settings. 9 Switch the Multi-Point setting OFF if you only use one listening position.
37
En
Page 38
07
The System Setup menu
3 Connect the microphone to the
MCACC SETUP MIC
jack on the front panel.
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.
AUDIO VIDEO
PHONES
PARAMETER
(TUNE)
(ST) (ST)
ENTER
(TUNE)
SETUP
RETURN
TUNER EDITSPEAKERS BAND
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
MULTI – ZONE &
SIGNAL
SOURCE/REC SEL
SELECT
CONTROL ON/OFF
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO L RAUDIO
PROCESSING
STEREO/
SB ch
F.S.SURR
If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your normal listening position. Otherwise, place the microphone at ear level using a table or a chair.
4 Follow the instructions on-screen.
• Make sure the microphone is connected.
• If you’re using a subwoofer, it is automatically detected every time you switch on the system. Make sure it is on and the volume is turned up.
• See Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 9 for notes regarding high background noise levels and other possible interference.
5 Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish outputting test tones.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while it’s doing this.
• Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.
• With error messages (such as Too much ambient noise! or Check Microphone) select RETRY after checking for ambient noise (see Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 9) and verifying the mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and continue.
6 If necessary, confirm the speaker configuration in the OSD.
1
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the actual speakers you have.
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the speaker configuration check screen is being displayed, the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in step 7.
DVD/LD
1. Auto MCACC
Now Analyzing… ( 2/11)
Environment Check Ambient Noise [ OK ] Microphone [ ] Speaker YES/NO [ ]
0.0
:Cancel
dB
DVD/LD
1. Auto MCACC
CHECK Front [ YES ] Center [ YES ] Surr [ YES ] SB [ YESx2 ] SW [ YES ]
OK
10:Next
0.0
:Cancel
If you see an error message (ERR) in the right side column (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t correct), there may be a problem with the speaker connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the power and check the speaker connections. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use / to select the speaker and / to change the setting (and number for surround back) and continue.
7 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press
ENTER
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs more test tones to determine the optimum receiver settings for channel level, speaker distance, and Acoustic Calibration EQ.
DVD/LD
1. Auto MCACC
Now Analyzing
Subwoofer Check
0.0
:Cancel
DVD/LD
dB
1. Auto MCACC
Now Analyzing… ( 6/11)
Surround Analysis Speaker System [ OK ] Channel Level [ OK ] Speaker Distance [ ]
-
55.0
:Cancel
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.
• If you selected a Stand.Wave Multi-Point setup (in step 2), you will be asked to place the mic at the 2nd and 3rd reference points before finally placing it at your main listening position.
8 The Auto MCACC Setup has finished! Press to go back to the System Setup menu.
DVD/LD
5a. MCACC Data Check
1. Speaker Setting
2. Channel Level
3. Speaker Distance
4. Standing Wave
5. Acoustic Cal EQ
6. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
ENTER:Next
-
55.0
:Return
dB
dB
.
dB
RETURN
38
En
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is also possible to adjust these settings manually using the
System Setup menu (starting on page 36).
Note
1 This screen is only shown if you selected ALL or Speaker Setting in Custom Menu from the Auto MCACC CUSTOM menu. 2 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 5 inches (12 cm) will end up with different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 47.
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and
room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.
2
Page 39
The System Setup menu
07
You can also choose to view the settings by selecting individual parameters from the MCACC Data Check screen:
Speaker Setting – The size and number of speakers you’ve connected (see page 47 for more on this)
Channel Level – The overall balance of your speaker system (see page 40 or 48 for more on this)
Speaker Distance – The distance of your speakers from the listening position (see page 41 or 48 for
more on this)
1
Standing Wave – Filter settings to control lower ‘boomy’ frequencies (see page 41 for more on this)
Acoustic Cal EQ – Adjustments to the frequency balance of your speaker system based on the acoustic characteristics of your room (see page 42 for more on this)
FULL BAND PHASE CTRL – The original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the targeted characteristics can be displayed graphically (see Full Band Phase Control on page 44 for more on this).
Press ENTER after you have finished checking each screen. When you’re finished, select RETURN to go back to the System Setup menu.
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver upon completion of the Auto MCACC setup.
Speaker B – Select to use the (surround back) B speaker terminals to listen to stereo playback in another room (see Speaker B setup on page 57).
Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re bi­amping your front speakers (see Bi-amping your front speakers on page 57).
ZONE 2 – Select to use the (surround back) B speaker terminals for an independent system in another zone (see MULTI-ZONE listening on page 59).
3 When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You will return to the System Setup menu.
Manual MCACC setup
You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC setup menu to make detailed adjustments when you’re more familiar with the system. Before making these settings, you should have already completed Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8.
You only need to make these settings once (unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or add new speakers).
Caution
• The test tones used in the System Setup are output at high volume.
Surround back speaker setting
• Default setting: Normal (default)
There are several ways you can use the surround back speaker channels with this system. In addition to a normal home theater setup where they are used for the surround back speakers, they can be used for bi-amping the front speakers or as an independent speaker system in another room.
1 Select ‘Surr Back System’ from the System Setup menu.
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu above if you’re not already at this screen.
DVD/LD
System Setup MENU
1. Auto MCACC
2. Surr Back System
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
5. Data Management
6. Manual SP Setup
7. Input Setup
8. Other Setup
-
:Exit
55.0
dB
DVD/LD
2. Surr Back System Normal (default)
Front :Normal Center :Normal Surr :Normal SB :Normal
--.-
:Finish
dB
Important
• You will need to first specify the MCACC preset you want to adjust by pressing MCACC before pressing
SETUP (step 2 in Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on page 36). When Manual
MCACC is selected while MCACC is set to OFF, the selection screen for the MCACC memory appears. Select a memory to adjust manually.
DVD/LD
3. Manual MCACC
Select MCACC memory.
MCACC OFF
M1. MEMORY 1
ENTER:Next
-
55.0
:Cancel
dB
2 Select the surround back speaker setting.
Normal (default) – Select for normal home theater use with surround back speakers in your main (speaker system A) setup.
Note
1 Since the distance measurements have been set according to the sound characteristics of your speakers, there are cases where (for optimal surround sound) the actual distance may differ from the speaker distance setting.
39
En
Page 40
07
The System Setup menu
• For some of the settings below, you’ll have to connect the setup microphone to the front panel and place it about ear level at your normal listening position. Press SETUP to display the System Setup menu before you connect the microphone to this receiver. If the microphone is connected while the System Setup menu is not being displayed, the display will change to the Auto MCACC setup menu. See Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 9 for notes regarding high background noise levels and other possible interference.
• If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on and turn up the volume to the middle position.
1 Select ‘Manual MCACC’ from the System Setup menu.
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on page 36 if you’re not already at this screen.
DVD/LD
System Setup MENU
1. Auto MCACC
2. Surr Back System
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
5. Data Management
6. Manual SP Setup
7. Input Setup
8. Other Setup
-
55.0
:Exit
DVD/LD
dB
3. Manual MCACC
a. Fine Channel Level
b. Fine SP Distance c. Standing Wave d. EQ Adjust e. EQ Professional
-
55.0
:Return
dB
2 Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you’re doing this for the first time, you might want to make these settings in order.
Fine Ch Level – Make fine adjustments to the overall balance of your speaker system (see Fine Channel Level below).
Fine SP Distance – Make precise delay settings for your speaker system (see Fine Speaker Distance on page 41).
Standing Wave – Control overly resonant low frequencies in your listening room (see Standing Wave on page 41).
The last two settings are specifically for customizing the parameters explained in Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 42:
EQ Adjust – Manually adjust the frequency balance of your speaker system while listening to test tones (see Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 42).
EQ Professional – Calibrate your system based on the direct sound coming from the speakers and make detailed settings according to your room’s reverb characteristics (see Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 42).
Fine Channel Level
• Default setting: 0.0dB (all channels)
You can achieve better surround sound by properly adjusting the overall balance of your speaker system. The following setting can help you make detailed adjustments that you may not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 47.
1 Select ‘Fine Ch Level’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.
The volume increases to the 0.0 dB reference level.
DVD/LD
3. Manual MCACC
a. Fine Channel Level
b. Fine SP Distance c. Standing Wave d. EQ Adjust e. EQ Professional
2 Adjust the level of the left channel.
This will be the reference speaker level, so you may want to keep the level around 0.0dB so that you’ll have plenty of room to adjust the other speaker levels.
• After pressing ENTER, test tones will be output.
3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the levels (
+/–10dB
) as necessary.
Use / to adjust the volume of the speaker you selected to match the reference speaker. When it sounds like both tones are the same volume, press to confirm and continue to the next channel.
• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will change depending on which speaker you select.
• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply use / to select it.
4 When you're finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
-
55.0
dB
DVD/LD
3a. Fine Channel Level
CAUTION!
Loud test tones will
:Return
DVD/LD
3a. Fine Channel Level
MCACC : M1. MEMORY 1
Ref.Ch : L +0.5dB
ENTER:Next :Cancel
DVD/LD
3a. Fine Channel Level
R L
L +0.5dB R -1.5dB C [ +1.0dB ] SL [ -9.5dB ] SR [ +10.0dB ]
be output.
SBL[ -9.5dB ]
SBR[+10.0dB ] SW [ -1.5dB ]
:Finish
Please wait... 20
:Cancel
0.0
dB
0.0
dB
-
20.0
dB
40
En
Page 41
The System Setup menu
07
Fine Speaker Distance
• Default setting: 10’00’’ (all speakers)
For proper sound depth and separation with your system, it is necessary to add a slight bit of delay to some speakers so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. The following setting can help you make detailed adjustments that you may not achieve using the Manual speaker setup below.
1 Select ‘Fine SP Distance’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.
DVD/LD
3. Manual MCACC
a. Fine Channel Level
b. Fine SP Distance
c. Standing Wave d. EQ Adjust e. EQ Professional
2 Adjust the distance of the left channel from the listening position.
3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the distance as necessary.
Use / to adjust the delay of the speaker you selected to match the reference speaker. The delay is measured in terms of speaker distance from 0’01’’ to 45’00’’.
DVD/LD
3b. Fine SP Distance
SL L L 10'10'' R [ 9'11''] C [ 10'10''] SL 9'08'' SR [ 9'09'']
:Finish
Listen to the reference speaker and use it to measure the target channel. From the listening position, face the two speakers with your arms outstretched pointing at each speaker. Try to make the two tones sound as if they are arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in front of
you and between your arm span.
When it sounds like the delay settings are matched up, press to confirm and continue to the next channel.
• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will change depending on which speaker you select.
-
55.0
:Return
0.0
dB
DVD/LD
3b. Fine SP Distance
MCACC : M1. MEMORY 1
Ref.Ch : L 10'00''
ENTER:Next :Cancel
dB
DVD/LD
3b. Fine SP Distance
SBL SL
SBL 6'02'' SBR [ 6'03''] SW [ 12'01'']
:Finish
1
0.0
dB
0.0
dB
• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply use / to select it.
4 When you're finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
Standing Wave
• Default setting: ON
Acoustic standing waves occur when, under certain conditions, sound waves from your speaker system resonate mutually with sound waves reflected off the walls in your listening area. This can have a negative effect on the overall sound, especially at certain lower frequencies. Depending on speaker placement, your listening position, and ultimately the shape of your room, it results in an overly resonant (‘boomy’) sound. The Standing Wave Control uses filters to reduce the effect of overly resonant sounds in your listening area. During playback of a source, you can customize the filters used for Standing Wave Control for each of your MCACC
3
presets.
1 Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.
DVD/LD
3. Manual MCACC
a. Fine Channel Level b. Fine SP Distance
c. Standing Wave
d. EQ Adjust e. EQ Professional
2 Select ‘ON’ (if it is not already selected) then adjust the parameters for the Standing Wave Control.
Filter Ch – Select the channel to which you will apply the filter(s): Main (all except center channel and subwoofer), Center or SW (subwoofer).
TRIM (only available when the filter channel above is SW) – Adjust the subwoofer channel level (to compensate for the difference in output post-filter).
f / Q / ATT – These are the filter parameters where f represents the frequency you will be targeting and Q is the bandwidth (the higher the Q, the narrower the bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation (ATT, the amount of reduction to the targeted frequency).
3 When you're finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
2
-
55.0
:Return
DVD/LD
dB
3c. Standing Wave
MCACC : M1. MEMORY 1
Filter Ch SW TRIM [ +12.0
No. 1 2 3 f [ 63 Q [ 3.0
ATT
[ 2.5
Hz
] [ 110
Hz
] [ 250
] [ 8.0 ] [ 5.0 ]
dB
] [ 6.0
dB
] [ 6.0
:Finish
-
55.0
dB
dB
]
Hz
]
dB
]
Note
1 • If you can’t seem to achieve this by adjusting the distance setting, you may need to change the angle of your speakers very slightly.
• For better audibility, the subwoofer emits a continuous test tone (oscillating pulses are heard from your other speakers). Note that it may be difficult to compare this tone with the other speakers in your setup (depending on the low frequency response of the reference speaker). 2 You can switch on or off the Standing Wave feature in the Audio Parameter menu. See Setting the Audio options on page 71 for more on this. 3 • Since they will be overwritten, you may want to save the standing wave settings made with the Auto MCACC Setup to another MCACC preset.
• Standing Wave control filter settings cannot be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI connection.
• When Standing Wave is selected for a MCACC preset memory where S-WAVE is set to OFF in the Audio parameter, S-WAVE ON is automatically selected.
41
En
Page 42
07
The System Setup menu
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust
Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of room equalizer for your speakers (excluding the subwoofer). It works by measuring the acoustic characteristics of your room and neutralizing the ambient characteristics that can color the original source material (providing a ‘flat’ equalization setting). If you’re not satisfied with the adjustment provided in Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 36, you can also adjust these settings manually to get a frequency
balance that suits your tastes.
1 Select ‘EQ Adjust’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.
DVD/LD
3. Manual MCACC
a. Fine Channel Level b. Fine SP Distance c. Standing Wave
d. EQ Adjust
e. EQ Professional
2 Confirm that the MCACC preset shown in the display is the one you want to adjust, then select START.
DVD/LD
3d. EQ Adjust
MCACC:M1. MEMORY 1
[ START ]
ENTER:Next :Cancel
3 Select the channel(s) you want and adjust to your liking.
DVD/LD
3d. EQ Adjust
63Hz [ +0.5]
MCACC : M1
125Hz [ -5.5]
Ch [SBL]
250Hz [ +3.0]
dB
500Hz [ 0.0] 1kHz +12.0 2kHz [ +5.5] 4kHz [
63
125
8kHz [ 0.0] 16kHz [ +7.0] :Finish
Use the / buttons to select the channel. Use the / buttons to select the frequency and /
to boost or cut the EQ. When you’re finished, go back to the top of the screen and use the / buttons to select the next channel.
•The OVER! indicator shows in the display if the frequency adjustment is too drastic and might distort. If this happens, bring the level down until OVER! disappears from the display.
250
1k2k4k
500
8k
16k
TRM
TRIM [
1
-
55.0
:Return
-
55.0
-
55.0
-3.0]
-2
.5]
dB
dB
dB
Tip
• Changing the frequency curve of one channel too drastically will affect the overall balance. If the speaker balance seems uneven, you can raise or lower channel levels using test tones with the TRIM feature. Use / to select TRIM then use / to raise or lower the channel level for the current speaker.
4 When you're finished, press
RETURN
.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of room reverberation by allowing you to calibrate your system based on the direct sound coming from the speakers. It can also provide you with a graphical output of the
frequency response of your room.
How to use Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
If you find that lower frequencies seem overly reverberant in your listening room (i.e. it sounds ‘boomy’), or that different channels seem to exhibit different reverb characteristics, select EQ Pro. & S-Wave (or ALL) for the Custom Menu setting in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 36 to calibrate the room automatically. This should provide a balanced calibration that suits the characteristics of your listening room.
If you still aren't satisfied with the results, the manual Advanced EQ setup (below) provides a more customized calibration of your system using the direct sound of the speakers. This is done with the help of a graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or using a computer (with software available from Pioneer — see Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 63).
How to interpret the graphical output
The graph shows decibels on the vertical axis and time (in milliseconds) on the horizontal axis. A straight line indicates a flat-response room (no reverb), whereas a sloping line indicates the presence of reverberation when outputting test tones. The sloping line will eventually flatten out when the reverberant sound stabilizes (this usually takes about 100 ms or so).
2
42
En
Note
1 When EQ Adjust is selected for a MCACC preset memory where EQ is set to OFF in the Audio parameter, EQ ON is automatically selected. 2 This system allows you to customize your system calibration with the help of a graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or using a computer (with software available from Pioneer—see Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 63 for more on this).
Page 43
The System Setup menu
07
By analyzing the graph, you should be able to see how your room is responding to certain frequencies. Differences in channel level and speaker distance are taken into account automatically (compensation is provided for comparison purposes), and the frequency measurements can be examined both with and without
the equalization performed by this receiver.
1
Setting Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional according to your room characteristics
Using the manual setup, you can set the time period at which the frequency response is analyzed, pinpointing the time that is best for system calibration with your particular room characteristics.
The graph below shows the difference between conventional acoustic calibration and professional calibration (the gray circle indicates the point where the microphone captures sound during frequency analysis).
Level
Test tone
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro. calibration range
0 16080
Conventional Acoustic Cal. EQ calibration range
Time (in msec.)
As soon as audio is output from your speaker system, it is influenced by room characteristics, such as walls, furniture, and the dimensions of the room. The sooner the frequency analysis, the less it is influenced by the room. We recommend an earlier time setting of 30~50ms to compensate for two major factors that will influence the sound of most rooms:
Reverberance of high vs. low frequencies – Depending on your room, you may find that lower frequencies seem overly reverberant compared to higher frequencies (i.e. your room sounds ‘boomy’). This may result in a skewed frequency analysis if the measurement is done too late.
Level
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro. calibration range
0 16080
Conventional Acoustic Cal. EQ calibration range
Low frequencies
High frequencies
Time (in msec.)
Reverb characteristics for different channels – Reverb characteristics can be somewhat different for each channel. Since this difference increases as the sound is influenced by the various room characteristics, it is often better to capture a frequency analysis early on for smoother mixing of channel frequencies/sounds.
Level
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro. calibration range
0 16080
Conventional Acoustic Cal. EQ calibration range
Left surround
Right Surround
Time (in msec.)
If your room isn’t affected by the factors above, it is often not necessary to make a 30~50ms setting. Later time settings may provide a more detailed sound experience with your speaker system. It is best to try and see what works best for your particular room.
Note that changing the room (for example, moving furniture or paintings) will affect the calibration results. In such cases, you should recalibrate your system.
Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
1 Select ‘EQ Professional’ then press ENTER.
DVD/LD
3. Manual MCACC
a. Fine Channel Level b. Fine SP Distance c. Standing Wave d. EQ Adjust
e. EQ Professional
-
55.0
:Return
dB
DVD/LD
3e. EQ Professional
1. Reverb Measurement
2. Reverb View
3. Advanced EQ Setup
e.EQ Professional
ENTER:Next
-
55.0
:Return
dB
2 Select an option and press ENTER.
Reverb Measurement – Use this to measure the reverb characteristics of your room (for graphical output using a PC, see Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 63 to connect an RS-232C cable before selecting this option).
Reverb View – You can check the reverb measurements made for specified frequency ranges in each channel.
Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select the time period that will be used for frequency adjustment and calibration, based on the reverb measurement of your listening area. Note that customizing system calibration using this setup will alter the settings you made in Automatically setting up for surround sound
(MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 36 and is not
necessary if you’re satisfied with these settings.
Note
1 Note that due to an effect known as ‘group delay’, lower frequencies will take longer to be generated than higher frequencies (this is most obvious when comparing the frequencies at 0 ms). This initial slope is not a problem (i.e. excessive reverb) with your listening room.
43
En
Page 44
07
The System Setup menu
3 If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’, select EQ ON or OFF and then START.
DVD/LD
3e1. Reverb Measurement
MCACC : M1. MEMORY 1
Reverb Measure with EQ OFF
[ Start ]
-
:Cancel
DVD/LD
55.0
dB
3e1. Reverb Measurement
Now Analyzing… ( 2/ 5)
Environment Check Ambient Noise [ OK] Microphone [ ] Speaker Level [ ]
0.0
:Cancel
dB
The following options determine how the reverb characteristics of your listening area are displayed in Reverb View and Output PC (Data Management):
EQ OFF – You will see the reverb characteristics of your listening area without the equalization performed by this receiver (before calibration).
EQ ON – You will see the reverb characteristics of your listening area with the equalization performed
by this receiver (after calibration).
1
Note that the EQ response may not appear entirely flat due to adjustments necessary for your listening area.
When the reverb measurement is finished, you can select Reverb View to see the results on-screen. See Professional Calibration EQ graphical output on page 86 for troubleshooting information.
4 If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can check the reverb characteristics for each channel. Press RETURN when you’re done.
DVD/LD
Reverb View
3e2.
M1 : EQ OFF Ch L Fq [ 125Hz ]
dB
0 80 160ms
-
55.0
:Return
dB
This appears according to the setting you chose in Reverb Measurement (step 3 above). Use the / buttons to select the channel and the frequency you want to check. Use the / buttons to go back and forth between the two. Note that the markers on the vertical axis indicate decibels in 2 dB steps.
5 If ‘Advanced EQ Setup’ is selected, enter the desired time setting for calibration. Press to proceed to the next screen, and then select START.
Based on the reverb measurement above, you can choose the time period that will be used for the final frequency adjustment and calibration. Even though you can make this setting without reverb measurement, it is
best to use the measurement results as a reference for your time setting. For an optimal system calibration based on the direct sound coming from the speakers, we recommend using the 30~50ms setting.
DVD/LD
3e3. Adv. EQ Setup (1/2)
Ch L Fq [ 125Hz] Tm [30
dB
0 80 160ms
-
55.0
-
50ms]
:Cancel
dB
DVD/LD
3e3. Adv. EQ Setup (2/2)
MCACC :M1.MEMORY 1 EQ Type SYMMETRY Stand.Wave Multi-Point [ NO ]
[ START ]
: Cancel
-
55.0
dB
Use the / buttons to select the channel, frequency, and time setting. Use the / buttons to switch between them.
You can switch between your connected speakers (excluding the subwoofer), and display the measurements for the following frequencies: 63Hz,
125Hz, 250Hz, 500Hz, 1kHz, 2kHz, 4kHz, 8kHz and 16kHz.
Select the setting from the following time periods (in milliseconds): 0~20ms, 10~30ms, 20~40ms, 30~50ms, 40~60ms, 50~70ms and 60~80ms. This setting will be applied to all channels during calibration.
When you’re finished, select START. It will take about 2 to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish.
After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is set, you are given the option to check the settings on-screen.
Full Band Phase Control
The Full Band Phase Control feature calibrates the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers connected and corrects the phase distortion. This receiver analyzes the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers by calibrating test signals output from the speakers with the supplied microphone, therefore flattening the analyzed frequency-phase characteristics during audio signal playback. This correction minimizes group delay between the middle- and low-frequency ranges and improves the frequency-phase characteristics across all ranges. Furthermore, the enhanced frequency-phase characteristics between channels ensure better surround sound integration for multichannel sources. For details, see Using Full Band Phase Control on page 11.
This section describes how to calibrate the frequency­phase characteristics of the speakers only. Once you have performed calibration with Auto MCACC set as a default setting or with CUSTOM set to ALL, the Full Band Phase Control calibration is already done (In this case, the previous settings are overwritten if you perform calibration again as described here).
44
En
Note
1 The calibration corresponding to the currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is selected. To use another MCACC preset, exit the System Setup menu and
press MCACC to select it before pressing SETUP
.
Page 45
The System Setup menu
07
1 Select ‘
FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
’ from the System
Setup menu.
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu above if you’re not already at this screen.
DVD/LD
System Setup MENU
1. Auto MCACC
2. Surr Back System
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
5. Data Management
6. Manual SP Setup
7. Input Setup
8. Other Setup
2 Select an option and press
-
:Exit
55.0
dB
DVD/LD
4. FULL BAND PASE CTRL
a. Measurement
b. Group Delay View
ENTER:Next
ENTER
:Return
.
-
55.0
dB
Measurement – Calibrates and corrects the frequency-phase characteristics of each speaker.
Group Delay View – The original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the targeted characteristics can be displayed graphically.
3 If you selected ‘
DVD/LD
4a. Measurement
FULL BAND PHASE CTRL Measurement
[ START ]
ENTER:Start
Measurement
-
55.0
dB
DVD/LD
4a. Measurement
Now Analyzing… ( 5/ 5)
FULL BAND PHASE CTRL Delay Check [ OK] Group Delay [ ]
ENTER:Start
:Cancel
’, press
ENTER
0.0
dB
:Cancel
.
When the Full Band Phase Control measurement is finished, you can select Group Delay View to see the results on-screen.
4 If you selected ‘
Group Delay View
’, you can check
the graph showing the group delay characteristics.
dB
Tgt
Targeted characteristics
^
after correction
^ ^
Org
Original characteristics
Hz
of the speakers calibrated
1
Press
RETURN
DVD/LD
4b. Group Delay View
ms
then you’re done.
-
Original & Target Channel Front
55.0
:Return
This appears according to the setting you chose in Measurement (Step 2 above). Use / to select the
channel you want to check.
2
Data Management
This system allows you to store up to six MCACC presets, allowing you to calibrate your system for different listening positions (or frequency adjustments for the
same listening position). settings to match the kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).
From this menu you can check your current settings, copy from one preset to another, name presets for easier identification and clear any ones you don’t need.
1 Select ‘Data Management’ from the System Setup menu.
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu above if you’re not already at this screen.
DVD/LD
System Setup MENU
1. Auto MCACC
2. Surr Back System
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
5. Data Management
6. Manual SP Setup
7. Input Setup
8. Other Setup
2 Select the setting you want to adjust.
MCACC Data Check – Check the settings for any of your MCACC presets using the on-screen display (see Checking MCACC preset data below).
Memory Rename – Name your MCACC presets for easy identification (see Renaming MCACC presets below).
MCACC Memory Copy – Copy settings from one MCACC preset to another (see Copying MCACC preset data below).
MCACC Memory Clear – Clear any MCACC presets that you don’t want (see Clearing MCACC presets below).
Output PC – See Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 63 for more on this.
Checking MCACC preset data
After you have completed Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on
page 8 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 36, you can check your calibrated settings using the on-screen display.
3
This is useful for alternate
-
55.0
:Exit
DVD/LD
dB
5. Data Management
a. MCACC Data Check
b. Memory Rename c. MCACC Memory Copy d. MCACC Memory Clear e. Output PC
-
55.0
:Return
dB
Note
1 When your PC is connected to this receiver, the original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the corrected characteristics of group delay can be displayed in 3-dimension on your PC. 2 • The subwoofer is excluded from correction.The super tweeter in the super high-frequency range is excluded from correction. Also, speakers theoretically unaffected by group delay (full-range speakers, for instance) are excluded from correction. Because calibration involves the spatial characteristics, you may not get the same results after you perform calibration again depending on your audiovisual environment and your speaker system. 3 This can be done in Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 36, either of which you should have already completed.
45
En
Page 46
07
The System Setup menu
1 Select ‘MCACC Data Check’ from the Data Management setup menu.
DVD/LD
5. Data Management
a. MCACC Data Check
b. Memory Rename c. MCACC Memory Copy d. MCACC Memory Clear e. Output PC
-
55.0
:Return
DVD/LD
dB
5a. MCACC Data Check
1. Speaker Setting
2. Channel Level
3. Speaker Distance
4. Standing Wave
5. Acoustic Cal EQ
6. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
ENTER:Next
-
55.0
:Return
dB
2 Select the setting you want to check.
• It is useful to do this while a source is playing so you can compare the different settings.
3 Select the MCACC preset that you want to check.
Use the / buttons if necessary to switch speakers/ settings.
-
55.0
dB
TRIM
4 Press
RETURN
DVD/LD
5a5. EQ Data Check
MCACC M1 63Hz : +0.5 Ch [SBL] 125Hz : -5.5 dB
250Hz : +3.0 500Hz : 0.0 1kHz : +12.0 2kHz : +5.5 4kHz : -3.0
1k2k4k
8k
63
16k
125
250
500
8kHz : 0.0 16kHz : +7.0 :Return TRIM : -2.5
to go back to the Data Check menu,
repeating steps 2 and 3 to check other settings.
5 When you're finished, press
RETURN
.
You will return to the Data Management setup menu.
Renaming MCACC presets
If you have several different MCACC presets that you’re using, you may want to rename them for easier identification.
1 Select ‘Memory Rename’ from the Data Management setup menu.
DVD/LD
5. Data Management
a. MCACC Data Check
b. Memory Rename
c. MCACC Memory Copy d. MCACC Memory Clear e. Output PC
-
55.0
:Return
DVD/LD
dB
5b. Memory Rename
MCACC Position Rename
M1 MEMORY 1 M2 [ MEMORY 2 ] M3 [ MEMORY 3 ] M4 [ MEMORY 4 ] M5 [ MEMORY 5 ] M6 [ MEMORY 6 ]
-
55.0
:Finish
dB
2 Select the MCACC preset you want to rename, then select an appropriate preset name.
Use / to select the preset, then / to select a preset name.
3 Repeat for as many MCACC presets as necessary, then press
RETURN
when you're finished.
You will return to the Data Management setup menu.
Copying MCACC preset data
If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see Manual MCACC setup above), we recommend
copying your current settings
1
to an unused MCACC preset. Instead of just a flat EQ curve, this will give you a reference point from which to start.
1 Select ‘
MCACC Memory Copy
’ from the Data
Management setup menu.
DVD/LD
5. Data Management
a. MCACC Data Check b. Memory Rename
c. MCACC Memory Copy
d. MCACC Memory Clear e. Output PC
-
55.0
:Return
dB
DVD/LD
5c. MCACC Memory Copy
Copy
All Data
From
[ M1. MEMORY 1 ]
To
[ M2. MEMORY 2 ]
Start Copy [Cancel ]
-
:Cancel
55.0
dB
2 Select the setting you want to copy.
All Data – Copies all the settings of the selected MCACC preset memory.
LEVEL & DISTANCE – Copies only the channel level and speaker distance settings of the selected MCACC preset memory.
3 Select the MCACC preset you’ll be copying the settings ‘From’ then specify where you want to copy them (‘To’).
Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC preset you’re currently using (this can’t be undone).
4 Select ‘Copy’ to confirm and copy the settings. Completed shows in the OSD to confirm the MCACC
preset has been copied, then you automatically return to the Data Management setup menu.
Clearing MCACC presets
If you are no longer using one of the MCACC presets stored in memory, you can choose to clear the calibration settings of that preset.
1 Select ‘
MCACC Memory Clear
’ from the Data
Management setup menu.
DVD/LD
5. Data Management
a. MCACC Data Check
b. Memory Rename c. MCACC Memory Copy
d. MCACC Memory Clear
e. Output PC
-
55.0
:Return
dB
DVD/LD
5d. MCACC Memory Clear
Clear M1. MEMORY 1
Start clear [Cancel]
-
55.0
:Cancel
dB
2 Select the MCACC preset you want to clear.
Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset you’re currently using (this can’t be undone).
3 Select ‘Clear’ to confirm and clear the preset. Completed shows in the OSD to confirm the MCACC
preset has been cleared, then you automatically return to the Data Management setup menu.
46
En
Note
1 The settings made in Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 36.
Page 47
The System Setup menu
Manual speaker setup
This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to optimize the surround sound performance. You only need to make these settings once (unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or add new speakers).
These settings are designed to customize your system, but if you’re satisfied with the settings made in
Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8, it isn’t necessary to
make all of these settings.
Caution
• The test tones used in the System Setup are output at high volume.
1 Select ‘Manual SP Setup’ then press
DVD/LD
System Setup MENU
1. Auto MCACC
2. Surr Back System
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
5. Data Management
6. Manual SP Setup
7. Input Setup
8. Other Setup
-
:Exit
55.0
DVD/LD
dB
6. Manual SP Setup
a. Speaker Setting
b. Channel Level c. Speaker Distance d. X-Curve e. THX Audio Setting
2 Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to adjust these settings in order:
Speaker Setting – Specify the size and number of speakers you’ve connected (see below).
Channel Level – Adjust the overall balance of your speaker system (page 48).
Speaker Distance – Specify the distance of your speakers from the listening position (page 48).
X-Curve – Adjust the tonal balance of your speaker system for movie soundtracks (page 49).
THX Audio Setting – Specify whether you are using a THX speaker setup (page 49).
3 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.
ENTER
-
55.0
:Return
.
dB
Speaker Setting
Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration (size, number of speakers and crossover frequency). It is a good idea to make sure that the settings made in
Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8 are correct.1 Note that
this setting applies to all MCACC presets, and cannot be set independently.
1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
DVD/LD
6. Manual SP Setup
a. Speaker Setting
b. Channel Level c. Speaker Distance d. X-Curve e. THX Audio Setting
2 Choose the set of speakers that you want to set then select a speaker size.
Use / to select the size (and number) of each of the following speakers:
Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or if you didn’t connect a subwoofer. Select SMALL to send the bass frequencies to the subwoofer.
Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center speaker, choose NO (the center channel is sent to the front speakers).
Surround – Select LARGE if your surround speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround speakers choose NO (the sound of the surround channels is sent to the front speakers or a subwoofer).
Surr Back – Select the number of surround back speakers you have (one, two or none).
if your surround back speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround back speakers choose NO.
2
-
55.0
:Return
dB
DVD/LD
6a. Speaker Setting
Front SMALL Center [ SMALL ] Surr [ SMALL ] SB [ SW [ YES ]
X. OVER [ 80Hz ]
(THX:ALL SMALL )
SMALL x2
]
3
-
55.0
dB
:Return
Select LARGE
07
Note
1 If you’re using a THX speaker setup, set all speakers to SMALL. 2 If you select SMALL for the front speakers the subwoofer will automatically be fixed to YES. Also, the center and surround speakers can’t be set to LARGE if the front speakers are set to SMALL. In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer. 3 • If you selected Speaker B or Front Bi-Amp (in Surround back speaker setting on page 39) you can’t adjust the surround back settings.
• If the surround speakers are set to NO, the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO.
• If you select one surround back speaker only, make sure that speaker is hooked up to the left surround back terminal.
47
En
Page 48
07
The System Setup menu
Subwoofer – LFE signals and bass frequencies of channels set to SMALL are output from the subwoofer when YES is selected. Choose the PLUS setting if you want the subwoofer to output bass sound continuously or you want deeper bass (the bass frequencies that would normally come out the front and center speakers are also routed to the
1
subwoofer).
If you did not connect a subwoofer choose NO (the bass frequencies are output from other speakers).
3 Select ‘X. OVER’ and set the crossover frequency.
Frequencies below this point will be sent to the subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Channel Level
Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the overall balance of your speaker system, an important factor when setting up a home theater system.
Important
• When Channel Level is selected while MCACC is set to OFF, the selection screen for the MCACC memory appears. Select a memory to adjust manually.
DVD/LD
6b. Channel Level
Select MCACC memory.
MCACC OFF
M1.MEMORY 1
ENTER:Next :Cancel
1 Select ‘Channel Level’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
DVD/LD
6. Manual SP Setup
a. Speaker Setting
b. Channel Level
c. Speaker Distance d. X-Curve e. THX Audio Setting
-
55.0
:Return
-
55.0
dB
dB
DVD/LD
6b. Channel Level
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1 Test Tone Auto
CAUTION!
Loud test tones will be output. ENTER:Next :Return
-
55.0
dB
2 Select a setup option.
MANUAL – Move the test tone manually from speaker to speaker and adjust individual channel levels.
AUTO – Adjust channel levels as the test tone moves from speaker to speaker automatically.
3 Confirm your selected setup option. The test tones will start after you press ENTER.
DVD/LD
2
6b. Channel Level
Please Wait . . . 20
-
20.0
:Return
dB
4 Adjust the level of each channel using the buttons.
If you selected MANUAL, use / to switch speakers. The AUTO setup will output test tones in the order shown on-screen:
DVD/LD
6b. Channel Level
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
L 0.0dB SR [ 0.0dB] C [ 0.0dB] SBR [ 0.0dB] R [ 0.0dB] SBL [ 0.0dB] SL [ 0.0dB] SW [ 0.0dB]
0.0
:Finish
dB
Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is emitted.
3
5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Tip
• The channel level can be changed at any time. Press RECEIVER then press CH LEVEL on the remote control, and then use / to adjust the level.
Speaker Distance
For good sound depth and separation from your system, you need to specify the distance of your speakers from the listening position. The receiver can then add the proper delay needed for effective surround sound.
/
48
En
Note
1 If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS for the subwoofer. This may not, however, yield the best bass results. Depending on the speaker placement of your room you may actually experience a decrease in the amount of bass due low frequency cancellations. In this case, try changing the position or direction of speakers. If you can’t get good results, listen to the bass response with it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears judge which sounds best. If you’re having problems, the easiest option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by selecting SMALL for the front speakers. 2 • This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE, or the subwoofer, and bass sounds playing back from those selected as SMALL. It also decides where the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel.
•If you’re using a THX speaker setup, confirm that the crossover frequency is set to 80Hz. 3 • If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, take the readings from your main listening position and adjust the level of each speaker to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow reading).
• The subwoofer test tone is output at low volumes. You may need to adjust the level after testing with an actual soundtrack.
Page 49
The System Setup menu
07
Important
• When Speaker Distance is selected while MCACC is set to OFF, the selection screen for the MCACC memory appears. Select a memory to adjust manually.
DVD/LD
6c. Speaker Distance
Select MCACC memory.
MCACC OFF
M1.MEMORY 1
ENTER:Next :Cancel
-
55.0
dB
1 Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
DVD/LD
6. Manual SP Setup
a. Speaker Setting b. Channel Level
c. Speaker Distance
d. X-Curve e. THX Audio Setting
-
55.0
:Return
DVD/LD
dB
6c. Speaker Distance
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
L 10'00" C [ 0'11" ] R [ 11'09" ]
2 Adjust the distance of each speaker using the
-
55.0
:Finish
dB
/
buttons.
You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 1 inch increments.
3 When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Tip
• For best surround sound, make sure the surround back speakers are the same distance from the listening position.
X-Curve
Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too bright when played back in large rooms. The X-Curve setting acts as a kind of re-equalization for home theater listening, and restores proper tonal balance of movie
soundtracks.
1 Select ‘X-Curve’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
1
DVD/LD
6. Manual SP Setup
a. Speaker Setting b. Channel Level c. Speaker Distance
d. X-Curve
e. THX Audio Setting
-
55.0
:Return
dB
DVD/LD
6d. X-Curve
X-Curve -2.0dB/oct
63
125
250
500
1k2k4k
-
55.0
8k
16k
:Finish
dB
2 Choose the X-Curve setting you want.
Use / to adjust the setting. The X-Curve is expressed as a downwards slope in decibels per octave, starting at 2 kHz. The sound becomes less bright as the slope increases (to a maximum of -3.0dB/oct). Use the following guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your room size:
Room size (ft2)
X-Curve (dB/oct)
400 550 650 800 2200 12000
–0.5 –1 –1.5 –2 –2.5 –3
•If you select OFF, the frequency curve will be flat and the X-Curve has no effect.
3 Select ‘Return’ then press ENTER to finish.
THX Audio Setting
For the most effective results when using the THX Select2 Cinema and THX MusicMode listening modes (see Using the Home THX modes on page 29) with the Advanced Speaker Array (ASA) system (see About THX on page 91), it is required that you make the setting. See Placing the speakers on page 20 for more on THX speaker
placement.
1 Select ‘THX Audio Setting’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
2 Specify the distance of your surround back speakers from each other.
0–1 ft – Surround speakers within 1 foot apart (best
>1– 4 ft – Surround speakers between 1 and 4 feet
4 ft < – Surround speakers more than 4 feet apart.
3 When you're finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
2
DVD/LD
6. Manual SP Setup
a. Speaker Setting b. Channel Level c. Speaker Distance d. X-Curve
e. THX Audio Setting
DVD/LD
6e. THX Audio Setting
SB SP Position
0-1 ft
SBL-SBR
for THX surround sound).
apart.
-
55.0
:Return
-
55.0
:Finish
dB
dB
Note
1 Since the principal is the same, X-Curve isn’t applied when you’re using any of the Home THX modes (see Using the Home THX modes on page 29). 2 If you don’t have surround back speakers, or just have one, you won’t be able to select this setting (Cannot select shows in the display).
49
En
Page 50
08
A
U
Other connections
Chapter 8:
Other connections
Caution
• Make sure the power is switched off before making or changing the connections.
Connecting an iPod
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow you to control playback of audio content from your iPod
using the controls of this receiver.
Connecting your iPod to the receiver
PRE OUT
AUDIO
ANTENNA
PHONO
M LOOP
IN
ZONE2
E
R
L
CD
IN
D
OUT
CD-R/ TAPE/ MD
T
IN
R
R
/ 1
SUB W.
SUR-
R/
ROUND
R 1
R/
SURROUND BACK
R 2
1
12 V TRIGGER
R L
(
DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
AUDIO
iPod Music > Extras > Settings >
Shuffle Songs
Backlight
MENU

Control Dock
for iPod
LR
FRONT
CENTER
SUB W.
SUR- ROUND
SUR­ROUND BACK
(
Single
LR
SIRIUS
L
IN
L
SPEAKERS
FRONT
IN
CENTER
iPod
LR
RS-232C
2
MULTI CH IN
)
1
)
FRONT
A
CENTER SURROUND S
RL RLR
iPod control
cable
1 Set this receiver to the standby mode, and then use the supplied iPod control cable
2
to connect your iPod to
the iPod terminal on the rear panel of this receiver.
Push the connector in until you hear it click home. To disconnect, squeeze the connector (as shown) to release the catch, then pull out.
2 Switch the receiver on and press the source
button to switch the receiver to the iPod.
iPod input
The front panel display shows Loading while the receiver verifies the connection and retrieves data from the iPod.
3 Use the TOP MENU button to display iPod Top menu.
When the display shows Top Menu you’re ready to play music from the iPod.
3
• If after pressing iPod the display shows No Connection, try switching off the receiver and reconnecting the iPod to the receiver.
iPod playback
To navigate songs on your iPod, you can take advantage of the OSD of your TV connected to this receiver.
also control all operations for music in the front panel display of this receiver.
Finding what you want to play
When your iPod is connected to this receiver, you can browse songs stored on your iPod by playlist, artist, album name, song name, genre or composer, similar to using your iPod directly.
1Use the
ENTER
press
iPod Top
[ Playlists [ Artists [ Albums [ Songs [ Podcasts [
Genres [ Composers [ Audiobooks [ Shuffle Songs
ENTER
/
buttons to select a category then
to browse that category.
–55dB
] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ]
• To return to the previous level, press RETURN.
4
You can
Note
1
This system is compatible with an iPod equipped with a dock connector port, iPod mini, iPod nano and iPod Photo portable device (third generation and above). However, compatibil ity may vary depending on the software version of your i Pod. This receiver do es not support software versions prior to iPod updater 2004-10-20 (plesae use the latest iPod software versions later than the iPod updater 2004-10-20). For supported versions, consult your local Pioneer dealer. 2 • This product is the Pioneer Control Dock for iPod (IDK-80) for use with an iPod equipped with a dock connector port (third generation and above), iPod mini, iPod nano or iPod Photo.
• For detailed instructions on using the iPod, please refer to the manual supplied with the iPod.
• The connected iPod should be updated with the latest iPod software versions later than the iPod updater 2004-10-20. 3 • The controls of your iPod will be inoperable when connected to this receiver (Pioneer shows in the iPod display). Features such as the equalizer cannot be controlled using this receiver, and we recommend switching the equalizer off before connecting.
• You can’t use the iPod, HOME MEDIA GALLERY (VSX-94TXH only), XM or SIRIUS Radio function simultaneously with the MULTI-ZONE feature (page 59). 4 • Note that non-roman characters in the playlist are displayed as #.
• This feature is not available for photos or video clips on your iPod.
50
En
Page 51
Other connections
08
2Use the
/
buttons to browse the selected
category (e.g., albums).
•Use / to move to previous/next levels.
3 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play, then press
to start playback.
1
Navigation through audio categories on your iPod looks like this:
Playlists Songs Artists Albums Songs Albums Songs Songs Podcasts Genres Artists Albums Songs Composers Albums Songs Audiobooks Shuffle Songs
Tip
• You can play all of the songs in a particular category by selecting the All item at the top of each category list. For example, you can play all the songs by a particular artist.
Basic playback controls
The following table shows the basic playback controls for your iPod:
Button What it does
Press to start playback.
Press to stop playback.
/ Press and hold during playback to start scanning.
/ Press to skip to previous/next song.
DISP Press repeatedly to change the song playback
/ During playback, press to skip to previous/next
If you start playback when something other than a song is selected, all the songs that fall into that category will play.
Pauses playback, or restarts playback when paused.
Press repeatedly to switch between Repeat One, Repeat All and Repeat Off.
Press repeatedly to switch between Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Albums and Shuffle Off.
information displayed.
playlist; when browsing, press to move to previous/ next levels.
Button What it does
/
TOP MENU
RETURN Press to return to the previous level.
During Audiobook playback, press to switch the playback speed: Faster Normal Slower
Press to return to the iPod Top menu screen.
Watching photos and video content
To view photos or video on your iPod, since video control is not possible using this receiver, you must use the main
controls of your iPod instead.
1Press
PHOTO
to switch to the iPod controls for
2
photo and video playback.
The receiver controls will be unavailable while you are watching iPod videos or browsing photos.
2Press
PHOTO
again to switch back to the receiver
controls when you’re done.
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Using XM Radio
XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in sports, news, talk and entertainment. XM is broadcast in superior digital audio from coast to coast. From rock to reggae, from classical to hip hop, XM has something for every music fan. XM’s dedication to playing the richest selection of music is matched by its passion for live sporting events, talk radio, up-to-the-minute news, stand­up comedy, children’s programming, and much more. For U.S. customers, information about XM Satellite Radio is available online at www.xmradio.com. For Canadian customers, information about XM Canada is online at www.xmradio.ca.
Connecting your XM Radio receiver
After purchasing an XM Mini-Tuner (sold separately), you will also need to activate the XM Radio digital radio
service to receive broadcasts.
3
Note
1 If you’re in the song category, you can also press ENTER to start playback. 2 Your iPod nano currently restricts viewing of photo images stored. 3 Hardware and required basic monthly subscription sold separately. Premium Channel available at additional monthly cost. Installation costs and other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling 1-800-XMRADIO. Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at xmradio.com. Only available in the 48 contiguous United States.
51
En
Page 52
08
I
S
R
E
S R
S
S R B
R
52
En
Other connections
Selecting channels and browsing by genre
MULTI-ZONE
OPTICAL
XM
& SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
IN (TV/
IN (BD)
IN (
DVR/
VCR 1
IN (
CD-R
IN
(
DVD/
LD
IN
COAXIAL
1
2
3
4
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
)
2
SAT
IN
)
)
)
1
1
(CD)
4
2
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
HDMI
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
41
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
1
CONTROL
IN
OUT
2
IN
(
DVD/ LD
3
4
IN
(BD)
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
1
IN
2
IN
1
Y
)
B
P
PR
2
Y
B
P
PR
(
VIDEO/GAME
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
( (BD)
ASSIGN­ABLE
FM UNBAL 75
IR
OUT
MONI­TOR OUT
)
DVD/LD
21
OUT
Y
B
P
PR
3
IN
Y
B
P
PR
1)
31
S-VIDEO
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
MONI­TOR OUT
1
IN
2
IN
VIDEO AUDIO
ANTENNA
AM LOOP
ZONE2ZONE2
R
L
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
BD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO /
GAME 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
R L
VSX-94TXH
SATELLiTE
RADiO
SATELLiTE RADiO
XM Mini-Tuner
1 Connect an XM Mini-Tuner to the XM Radio jack on the rear of this receiver.
You will also need to activate the XM Radio service.
2 Press RADIO
XM RADIO (SHIFT+BD)
1
input.
to switch to the
For best reception, you may need to move the XM Mini­Tuner antenna near a window (the southernmost window should produce the best results).
•If after pressing XM RADIO the display shows Check Tuner, try disconnecting the receiver and tuner connections and then plugging them back in. If the display shows Check Antenna, try disconnecting the tuner and antenna connections and then plugging
them back in.
2
Listening to XM Radio
After connecting, you will be able to use this receiver to select channels and navigate categories using the on-
screen display.
Note
1 You can’t use the iPod, XM and SIRIUS Radio functions simultaneously when using the MULTI-ZONE feature (page 59). 2 You can check the strength of reception in Using the XM Menu (page 53).
3 It ’s eas iest i f you h ave yo ur TV s witch ed on t o take advan tage of the OSDs. You can, however, use just the front panel display to do everything if you prefer. 4 Select XM000 (RADIO ID) from the on-screen display to check the Radio ID of the XM Mini-Tuner.
3
The information displayed is as follows:
A
Signal strength Preset class
Category Preset number Channel number
Artist name Song name
XM Radio
–55dB
Decades A1
Fifties (50's) XM005
Remy Sherman
Lovin' You
Channel name
AUDIO
PHONO
IN
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/ TAPE/ MD
IN
R
R
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
SURROUND BACK
1
(
DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
12 V TRIGGER
PRE OUT
LR
F
C
SUB W.
(
LR
SI
L
L
FRONT
IN
CENTER
iPod
LR
RS-232C
2
MULTI CH IN
)
From the XM Channel Guide, you can browse XM Radio channels in the order that they appear, or you can narrow your channel search by genre.
–55dB
Exit
] ] ] ] ] ] ] ]
• Press
/
and
XM Radio
Decades A1
Fifties (50's) XM005
Remy Sherman
Lovin' You
/
to display the XM Channel Guide then
ENTER
–55dB
XM Radio
Channel Guide
A
Previous [
000 RADIO ID
[
001 Preview
[
002 Highway1
[
003 America
[
004 Hank's Place
[
005 Fifties(50's)
[
006 Sixties(60's)
[
007 Seventies(70's)
ENTER Next
to select the channel of the XM radio
broadcast you want to hear.
• To browse by genre, first press CATEGORY, use / to select a genre then press ENTER.
4
• To cancel and exit any time, press RETURN.
Tip
• You can select channels directly by pressing D.ACCESS then the three-digit channel number.
• You can press DISP to change XM Radio information in the front panel display.
XM
• The currently selected channel is automatically chosen (without pressing ENTER) after five seconds.
Using XM HD Surround
XM HD Surround uses Neural Surround™ technology to achieve optimal surround sound from XM radio.
• While listening to XM Radio, press S.DIRECT for XM HD Surround listening.
See About Neural Surround on page 92 for more on this. XM HD Surround can be selected also with the
STANDARD button.
Saving channel presets
This receiver can memorize up to 30 channels, stored in three banks, or classes (A, B and C) of 10 stations each.
1 Select the channel you want to memorize.
See Selecting channels and browsing by genre above.
2 Press
The display shows a blinking memory class.
3 Press CLASS to select one of the three classes then press
You can also use the number buttons to select a preset.
T.EDIT
.
/
to select the channel preset you want.
• The default for all presets is XM001.
Page 53
Other connections
K
R
08
4Press
ENTER
.
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop blinking and the receiver stores the XM channel.
Tip
•You can also press MEMORY during reception display to save the information of up to five songs. See Using the XM Menu below to recall this information.
Listening to channel presets
You will need to have some presets stored to do this.
1 Press CLASS to select the class in which the channel is stored.
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A, B and C.
2Press
/
to select the channel preset you want.
• You can also use the number buttons on the remote control to recall the channel preset.
Using the XM Menu
The XM Menu provides additional XM Radio features.
1Press 2Use
Choose between the following menu items:
Channel Skip/Add – Use / and ENTER to select
Antenna Aiming – Check the strength of satellite
Memory Recall – Use / to browse your saved
3 When you’re finished press the reception display.
Connect & Play™, XM-Ready® and The Ultimate Playlist are trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc. ©2005 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
TOP MENU
/
to select a menu item then press
.
ENTER
channels you would like to remove/restore from/to the channel guide.
and terrestrial reception.
song information (See Tip above).
TOP MENU
to return to
.
Using SIRIUS Radio
With SIRIUS you get The Best Radio on Radio™ with all your favorite entertainment including 100 % commercial­free music, plus superior sports coverage, uncensored talk and comedy, world-class entertainment, news, weather and more for your car, home or office. For more information visit sirius.com or siriuscanada.ca
Sirius is available in the US for subscribers with addresses in the continental US and is available in Canada for subscribers with a Canadian address. Required subscription plus compatible SIRIUS tuner and antenna are required and sold separately. SIRIUS Programming is subject to change. Visit HYPERLINK “http://www.sirius.com” sirius.com for the most complete and up-to-date channel lineup and product information. “SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo and related marks are trademarks of Sirius Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved.
Connecting your SIRIUS Connect Tuner
To receive SIRIUS Satellite Radio broadcasts, you will need to activate your SIRIUS Connect tuner.
VSX-94TXH
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
OPTICAL
IN (TV/
IN (BD)
IN (
DVR/
VCR 1
IN (
CD-R
IN (
DVD/
LD
IN
COAXIAL
XM
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
IN
IR
1
MAIN
OUT
IN
2
ZONE2
HDMI
MONI­TOR
1
IN
OUT
CONTROL
(
)
1
DVD/LD
IN
(BD)
2
IN
1
IN
ASSIGN-
)
SAT
2
3
4
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
)
(CD)
2
IN
)
)
1
1
ASSIGNABLE
ABLE
OUT
1
2
2
IN
1
OUT
IN
Y
Y
( DVD/
)
LD
3
IN
B
B
P
41
4
IN
OUT
PR
2
IN
Y
(BD)
B
P
PR
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
( VIDEO/GAME
P
PR
3
IN
Y
B
P
PR
1)
31
S-VIDEO
4
2
DIGITAL
FM UNBAL 75
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
MONI­TOR OUT
1
IN
2
IN
VIDEO AUDIO
ANTENNA
PHONO
AM LOOP
IN
ZONE2ZONE2
R
L
CD
IN
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
OUT
BD
IN
CD-R/ TAPE/ MD
TV/SAT
IN
IN
VIDEO / GAME 1
IN
SUB W.
OUT
SUR-
DVR/
ROUND
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
R L
Antenna
SIRIUS
SIRIUS
AUDIO
R
SURROUND BACK
1
12 V TRIGGER
( DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
1
PRE OUT
LR
FRONT
CENTER
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
SUR­ROUND BACK
(
)
Single
LR
SIRIUS
L
IN
LLRR
SPEA
FRONT
A
IN
CENTER
iPod
RS-232C
2
MULTI CH IN
)
SiriusConnect™ HOME tuner
AC adapter
1 Connect a SIRIUS Connect tuner to the SIRIUS Radio jack on the rear of this receiver.
You will also need to connect the antenna and AC adapter to the Sirius Connect tuner.
Note
1 • In order to activate your radio subscription, you will need the SIRIUS ID (SID) which uniquely identifies your tuner. The SID may be found on a sticker located on the packaging, or on the bottom of the tuner itself. The label will have a printed 12-digit SID number. When you have located the SID, write it down in the space provided near the end of this manual. Contact SIRIUS on the internet at: https://activate.siriusradio.com Follow the prompts to activate your subscription, or you can also call SIRIUS toll-free at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474).
• Select SR000 (SIRIUS ID) from the on-screen display to check the Radio ID of the SIRIUS Connect tuner (see Selecting channels and browsing by genre
below).
53
En
Page 54
08
Other connections
2 Press SIRIUS
SIRIUS (SHIFT+TUNER)
input.
to switch to the
For best reception, you may need to move the SIRIUS Connect tuner antenna near a window (refer to the manual for the SiriusConnect Home tuner for antenna placement recommendations).
• If after pressing SIRIUS the display shows Antenna Error, try disconnecting the antenna and
reconnecting.
1
If the display shows Check Sirius Tuner, check the connection of the AC adapter and this receiver to the Sirius Connect tuner.
Listening to SIRIUS Radio
After connecting, you will be able to use this receiver to select channels and navigate categories using the on-
screen display.
Selecting channels and browsing by genre
From the SIRIUS Channel Guide, you can browse SIRIUS Radio channels in the order that they appear, or you can narrow your channel search by genre.
2
The information displayed is as follows:
SIRIUS –55dB
Decades A1
Fifties (50's) SR005
Chuck Berry
Johnny B. Goode
SIRIUS –55dB
Decades A1
Fifties (50's) SR005
Chuck Berry
Johnny B. Goode
A
Signal strength
A
Preset class Category
Preset number Channel number
Artist name Song name
Channel name
SIRIUS
Channel Guide
Next [
007 Seventies(70's)
[
006 Sixties(60's)
[
005 Fifties(50's)
[
004 Hank's Place
[
003 America
[
002 Highway1
[
001 Sirius Hits
[
000 Sirius ID
ENTER Pr evi ous
–55dB
Exit
] ] ] ] ] ] ] ]
• The currently selected channel is automatically chosen (without pressing ENTER) after 10 seconds.
Saving channel presets
This receiver can memorize up to 30 channels, stored in three banks, or classes (A, B and C) of 10 stations each.
1 Select the channel you want to memorize.
See Selecting channels and browsing by genre above.
2 Press
The display shows a blinking memory class.
3 Press press
You can also use the number buttons to select a preset.
4 Press
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop blinking and the receiver stores the SIRIUS channel.
Listening to channel presets
You will need to have some presets stored to do this.
1 Press is stored.
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A, B and C.
2 Press
T.EDIT
.
CLASS
to select one of the three classes then
/
to select the channel preset you want.
ENTER
.
3
Tip
• You can also press MEMORY during reception display to save the information of up to five songs. See Using the SIRIUS Menu below to recall this
information.
3
CLASS
to select the class in which the channel
/
to select the channel preset you want.
• You can also use the number buttons on the remote control to recall the channel preset.
54
En
• Press
/
to enter the SIRIUS Channel Guide, then
navigate through the channels one at time with the
/
buttons or switch through pages with the
buttons, then press
ENTER
to listen to the SIRIUS radio
/
broadcast.
• To browse by genre, first press CATEGORY, use
/// to select a genre then press ENTER.
• To cancel and exit any time, press RETURN.
Tip
• You can select channels directly by pressing D.ACCESS then the three-digit channel number.
• You can press DISP to change SIRIUS Radio information in the front panel display.
Note
1 You can check the strength of reception in Using the SIRIUS Menu on page 55. 2 It ’s eas iest i f you h ave yo ur TV s witch ed on t o take advan tage of the OSDs. You can, however, use just the front panel display to do everything if you prefer. 3 You can reset the Channel presets, Memory, Channel Skip/Add, Parental Lock and Password settings in Resetting the system on page 75.
Page 55
Other connections
C
A
E
08
Using the SIRIUS Menu
The SIRIUS Menu provides additional SIRIUS Radio features.
1Press 2Use
Choose between the following menu items:
3 When you’re finished press the reception display.
1
TOP MENU
/
to select a menu item then press
.
ENTER
Channel Skip/Add – Use / and ENTER to select channels you would like to remove/restore from/to the channel guide.
Parental Lock – Use / and ENTER to select channels you would like to place under parental lock. Channels put under parental lock are not displayed in the Channel Guide, but may be accessed by directly inputting their channel number and providing the parental lock password.
Antenna Aiming – Check the strength of satellite and terrestrial reception.
Memory Recall – Use / to browse your saved song information (see Tip above).
Password Set – Set the parental lock password.
TOP MENU
to return to
Connecting using HDMI
If you have a HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped compo­nent, you can connect it to this receiver using a commer-
cially available HDMI cable. The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital
video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the connected component is compatible with, including DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby
2
TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio (see below for limitations), Video CD/Super VCD, CD and MP3. See About the video converter on page 13 for more on HDMI compatibility.
.
HDMI OUT
OPTICAL
XM
HDMI/DVI-equipped component
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
1
IN
(TV/
SAT
2
IN
(BD)
3
IN
(
DVR/ VCR 1
4
IN
(
CD-R
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
IN (
DVD/
)
LD
2
IN
COAXIAL
)
(CD)
IN
)
)
1
4
1
2
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
HDMI
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
41
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
1
CONTROL
IN
OUT
2
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
)
LD
3
P
B
P
R
4
2
IN
Y
(BD)
B
P
P
R
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
(
1
DVD/LD
IN
(BD)
2
IN
ASSIGN­ABLE
(
VIDEO/GAME
FM UNBAL 75
IR
OUT
MONI­TOR OUT
)
21
OUT
Y
P
B
P
R
3
IN
Y
B
P
P
R
1)
31
S-VIDEO
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
MONI­TOR OUT
1
IN
2
IN
VIDEO AUDIO
VIDEO / GAME 1
DVD/LD
TV/SAT
ANTENNA
AM LOOP
ZONE2ZONE2
R
OUT
IN
BD
IN
IN
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
R L
VSX-94TXH
HDMI IN
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor or plasma display
1 Use an HDMI cable to connect one of the HDMI IN interconnects on this receiver to an HDMI output on your HDMI component. HDMI indicator lights on the front panel when an HDMI-
equipped component is connected.
2 Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT interconnect on this receiver to an HDMI interconnect on a HDMI-compatible monitor.
PHONO
IN
L
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/ TAPE / MD
IN
R
R
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
R
( TOTAL 50 mA MAX
AUDIO
SURROUND B
1
DC OUT 12V/
12 V TRIGG
)
Note
1 You can reset the Channel presets, Memory, Channel Skip/Add, Parental Lock and Password settings in Resetting the system on page 75. 2 • An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate adaptor (DVIHDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, however, does not support audio signals. Consult your local audio dealer for more information.
• If you connect a component that is not compatible with HDCP, a HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the front panel display. Some components
that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video this is not a malfunction.
• This receiver has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) Version 1.3a. Depending on the component you
have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers. Also, when using a component with HDMI version 1.0, it is not possible to output copy-controlled DVD-Audio CPPM sources from the HDMI connection.
• This receiver supports the DeepColor feature of HDMI. However, when analog signals are input, this receiver cannot output signals in DeepColor.
• This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage of these formats, however, make sure
that the component connected to this receiver also supports the corresponding format.
55
En
Page 56
08
Other connections
• The arrow on the cable connector body should be facing right for correct alignment with the connector on the player.
3 Use the INPUT SELECT button to select the HDMI input you’ve connected to (for example, HDMI 2).
You can also perform the same operation by using the
INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel or by pressing HDMI (SHIFT+TV CTRL) on the remote control
repeatedly.
• Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio options on page 71 to THROUGH if you want to hear HDMI audio output from your TV or plasma display (no sound will be heard from this receiver).
• If the video signal does not appear on your TV or plasma display, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. Note that some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In this case, use an analog video connection.
• You can’t hear HDMI audio through this receiver’s digital out jacks.
About HDMI
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) supports both video and audio on a single digital connection for use with DVD players, DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV devices. HDMI was developed to provide the technologies of High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface (DVI) in one specification. HDCP is used to protect digital content transmitted and received by DVI-compliant displays.
HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced, or high-definition video plus standard to multi-channel surround-sound audio. HDMI features include uncompressed digital video, one connector (instead of several cables and connectors), and communication between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs.
HDMI, the logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI licensing LLC.
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs
For DVD Audio and SACD playback, your DVD player may have 5.1, 6.1 or 7.1 channel analog outputs (depending on whether your player supports surround back
channels). multichannel analog audio.
1 Connect the front, surround, center and subwoofer outputs on your DVD player to the corresponding MULTI CH input jack on this receiver.
• Use standard RCA/phono jack cables for the
2 If your DVD player also has outputs for surround back channels, connect these to the corresponding MULTI CH input jacks on this receiver.
• Use standard RCA/phono jack cables for the
• If there is a single surround back output, connect it to
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs
If you have connected a decoder or a DVD player as above, you must select the analog multichannel inputs
for surround sound playback.
1 Make sure you have set the playback source to the proper output setting.
For example, you might need to set your DVD player to output multichannel analog audio.
2 Use the INPUT SELECT button to select MULTI CH IN.
You can also use the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel.
• Depending on the DVD player you’re using, the
1
Make sure that the player is set to output
connections.
connections.
the SURROUND BACK L (Single) jack on this receiver.
2
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
XM RADIO
HDMI
DVD TV
BD TV CTRL
analog output level of the subwoofer channel may be too low. In this case, the output level of the subwoofer can be increased by 10 dB in the Multi Ch In Setup in Other Setup. For details, see Multi Channel Input Setup on page 69.
56
En
Note
1 To listen to multichannel analog audio you’ll need to switch the input signal selector to MULTI CH IN (see Selecting the multichannel analog inputs above for more on this). 2 • When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected, you can’t use Midnight/Loudness, Dialog Enhancement or the SIGNAL SELECT and ANALOG ATT buttons, as well as any of the listening modes (including STEREO and the surround back channel processing).
• When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected, only the volume and channel levels can be set.
• You can’t listen to your speaker B (Second Zone) system during playback from the multichannel inputs.
Page 57
Other connections
Speaker B setup
Caution
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet. Plugging in components should be the last connection you make with your system.
• Be careful not to allow any contact between speaker wires from different terminals.
• You can use speakers with a nominal impedance between 6 to 16 (please see Switching the speaker impedance on page 74 if you plan to use speakers with an impedance of less than 8 Ω).
After selecting Speaker B in Surround back speaker setting on page 39, you can use the speakers connected to the (surround back) B speaker terminals on the rear panel to listen to stereo playback in another room. See Switching the speaker system below for the listening options with this setup.
1 Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back speaker terminals on the rear panel.
Connect them the same way you connected your speakers in Installing your speaker system on page 19. Make sure to review Placing the speakers on page 20 when placing the speakers in another room.
2 Select ‘ menu.
See Surround back speaker setting on page 39 to do this.
Switching the speaker system
If you selected Speaker B in Surround back speaker setting on page 39, three speaker system settings are
possible using the SPEAKERS button. If you selected Normal (default) or Front Bi-Amp, the button will
simply switch your main speaker system on or off. The options below are for the Speaker B setting only.
• Use the SPEAKERS button on the front panel to select a speaker system setting. As mentioned above, if you have selected Normal (default), the button will simply switch your main
speaker system (A) on or off.
PHONES
Speaker B
PARAMETER
AUDIO VIDEO
(TUNE)
(ST) (ST)
ENTER
(TUNE)
SETUP
RETURN
’ from the ‘Surr Back System’
1
MULTI – ZONE &
SIGNAL
STEREO/
TUNER EDITSPEAKERS BAND
USB
SETUP MIC
SOURCE/REC SEL
CONTROL ON/OFF
MCACC
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO L RAUDIO
SELECT
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
SB ch
PROCESSING
F.S.SURR
SPA – Sound is output from speaker system A and the same signal is output from the pre-out terminals.
SPB – Sound is output from the two speakers connected to speaker system B. Multichannel sources will not be heard. The same signal is output from the surround back channel pre-out terminals.
SPAB – Sound is output from speaker system A (up to 5 channels, depending on the source), the two speakers in speaker system B, and the subwoofer. The sound from speaker system B will be the same as the sound from speaker system A (multichannel sources will be downmixed to 2 channels).
SP (off) – No sound is output from the speakers. The same sound is output from the pre-out terminals (including from your subwoofer, if connected) as when selecting speaker system A (above).
Bi-amping your front speakers
Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver and low frequency driver of your speakers to different amplifiers (in this case, to both front and surround back terminals) for better crossover performance. Your speakers must be bi-ampable to do this (having separate terminals for high and low) and the sound improvement will depend on the kind of speakers you’re using.
1 Connect your speakers as shown below.
This illustration below shows the connections for bi­amping your front left speaker. Hook up your front right speaker in the same way.
SPEAKERS
A
FRONT
CENTER SURROUND
RL R LRL(Single)
Front left
speaker
High
Low
Since both front and surround back speaker terminals output the same audio, it doesn’t matter which set (front or surround back) is powering which part (High or Low) of the speaker.
• Make sure that the + / – connections are properly inserted.
SURROUND BACK /
B
SELECTABLE
08
Press repeatedly to choose a speaker system option:
Note
1 • The subwoofer output depends on the settings you made in Manual speaker setup on page 47. However, if SPB is selected above, no sound is heard from the subwoofer (the LFE channel is not downmixed).
• Depending on the settings in Surround back speaker setting on page 39 output from the surround back pre-out terminals may change.
• All speaker systems (except Speaker B connections) are switched off when headphones are connected.
57
En
Page 58
08
e
e
Other connections
2 Select the ‘Front Bi-Amp’ setting from the ‘Surr Back System’ menu.
See Surround back speaker setting on page 39 to specify how you’re using the surround back speaker terminals.
Caution
• Most speakers with both High and Low terminals have two metal plates that connect the High to the Low terminals. These must be removed when you are bi-amping the speakers or you could severely damage the amplifier. See your speaker manual for more information.
• If your speakers have a removable crossover network, make sure you do not remove it for bi-amping. Doing so may damage your speakers.
Bi-wiring your speakers
The reasons for bi-wiring are basically the same as bi­amping, but additionally, interference effects within the wire could be reduced, producing better sound. Again, to do this your speakers must be bi-wireable (that is they must have separate terminals for the high and low frequencies). When bi-wiring, make sure you’ve selected
Normal (default) or Speaker B in Surround back speaker setting on page 39.
• To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker cords to the speaker terminal on the receiver.
Using a banana plug for the second connection is recommended.
Caution
• Make sure you use a parallel (not series, which are fairly uncommon) connection when bi-wiring your speakers.
• Don’t connect different speakers from the same terminal in this way.
Connecting additional amplifiers
This receiver has more than enough power for any home use, but it’s possible to add additional amplifiers to every channel of your system using the pre-outs. Make the connections shown below to add amplifiers to power your speakers.
• Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet.
ANALOG
INPUT
PRE OUT
LR
FRONT
CENTER
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
SUR­ROUND BACK
(
)
Single
LR
SIRIUS
L
IN
L
SPEAKERS
FRONT
CENTER
L
BACK
RS-232C
2
MULTI CH IN
GER
)
X
FRONT
A
IN
R
iPod
VSX-94TXH
• You can use the additional amplifier on the surround back channel pre-outs for a single speaker as well. In this case plug the amplifier into the left (L (Single)) terminal only.
• The sound from the surround back terminals will depend on how you have configured the Surround back speaker setting on page 39.
• To hear sound only from the pre-outs, switch the speaker system to OFF, or simply disconnect any speakers that are connected directly to the receiver.
• If you’re not using a subwoofer, change the front speaker setting (see Speaker Setting on page 47) to large.
L R
ANALOG
INPUT
ANALOG
INPUT
ANALOG
INPUT
L R
ANALOG
INPUT
L R
Front channel amplifier
Center channel amplifier (mono)
Powered subwoof
Surround chann amplifier
Surround back channel amplifie
58
En
Page 59
Other connections
R
F
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
FM UNBAL 75
AM LOOP
MONI­TOR OUT
MONI­TOR OUT
OUT
CD
CD-R/ TAPE/ MD
DVD/LD
BD
TV/SAT
IN
IN
IN
CONTROL
OUT
PHONO
IN
IN
IN
Y Y
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
ANTENNA
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
IN
1
IN
2
ZONE2ZONE2
ZONE2
MAIN
(TV/
SAT
)
(BD)
( DVD/
LD
)
1
IN
2
( DVR/
VCR 1
)
IN
3
IN
OUT
1
IN
1
IN
2
R L
HDMI
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
IR
( DVD/LD
)
(BD)
IN
1
IN
2
IN
1
R
R
AUDIO
OPTICAL
LAN (10/100)
D
R
O
1
U
U
FM UNBAL 75
AM LOOP
MONI­TOR OUT
MONI­TOR OUT
OUT
CD
CD-R/ TAPE/
DVD/LD
BD
IN
IN
CONTROL
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
1
IN
2
ZONE2ZONE2
ZONE2
MAIN
R L
& SOURCE
IR
(
DVD/LD
)
(BD)
ASSIGN­ABLE
IN
1
IN
2
21
MULTI-ZONE listening
This receiver can power up to three independent systems in separate rooms after you have made the proper MULTI­ZONE connections. An example MULTI-ZONE setup is shown below, but the number of MULTI-ZONE connections (and the way you choose to connect them) depends on how you want to set up your system.
ASSIGN­ABLE
21
Sub zone (ZONE 2)Sub zone (ZONE 3) Main zone
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
MULTI-ZONE
/REC SEL
& SOURCE
OUT1 ZONE3
IN
1
OUT2
MAIN
IN
2
LAN (10/100)
ZONE2
HDMI
OPTICAL
1
IN
1
CONTROL
IN
2
IN
1
IN
IN
(TV/
)
SAT
OUT
2
IN
2
IN
(BD)
1
IN
Y
3
IN ( DVR/
( DVD/
)
VCR 1
)
LD
3
IN
4
P
B
IN (
)
CD-R
4
1
ASSIGN­ABLE
P
R
1
1
2
IN (
DVD/
4
IN
2
IN
)
LD
Y
(CD)
2
IN
(BD)
COAXIAL
P
B
OUT
IN
P
R
DIGITAL IN
R
E C E I VE
R
I N P U
T S E L E C
T
S Y
S T E M O
S
F
O
F
U R C E
C D
D V
T
D
VV
S
I D
A
E
T
D
O
V
2
R2
V I D E O
D
C
V
1
D-
R 1
R
T
V
C
O
X
i
N
M
P
T
R
o
A
d
D I O
T
R
U
OO
NE
M
2
R
/3
S L E E P
R
E
C
E
I
V
E
R
V I D E O S E L
S R +
A
N
A
L
O
G
A
T
D
T
I M M E R
D . A C C E S S + 1 0
AV P A
R
A T O
M
C L
P
E
A
T
S
M
E
S
R
E
N
U
D I
E
S
N
C
T E R
D T V
T U
M
N
E
E
N U
C H L
S
T
EV
S
E T
E
L
U
M
P
E N U
E N T
S
E
T
R
G
T
C
U
.
A
E
T
I
D
D
E G
I
E
T O R
Y
T U N E
R E
T
U
R
N
T V
C O
B
N
A
T
N
R
D
O
T
L
V V O
L I N P
U
S
T E L E
C
T
T
V C H
V O L
R E C
DT
V
M
I
N
P
F
X
O
M U
T
E R E
C S T
A
O
U
P D I
M
O
E M
S
O
U
R
B
Y
D
T I S
I
T P
L E H D D
S
T A T U S
D
C
V
H
S
D I G N
A L S E
C
L
H
S B
M
c
U
h L T
I O P E
S T E R E
T
O H X
S TAN
S H
D
I F
A R
T
D A D
V I
. S
S O
U P
R H
R A S E
M C ACC
S . DI R E
CT
R EC
EI V ER
R E C E I V E R
I S
N
E
P
L
U
E
C
T
C
D
D
T
V
DV
D
D
R
V
2
R 1
T
S
V
A
C
S
T
S
D
i
Y
L
P
S
-
AV
E
S
D
R
o
E
T
O
T
S
.
P
d
A
E
O
R
P
C
U
V
DTV
+
M A P
C
I
V
R
E
D
R M
O
S
S
I
A
E
D
C
M
S
X
E
F
O
E M
M
E
E
+
T
E
F N
T
O
G
2
N
R
1
ET
UP
U
U
A
0
1
U
U
D
N
E
I
I O
E
D
R
V
R
I
E
D
C
S
D
E
A
S
E
T
T
O
I
T
L
V
M
EG
T
R
C
M
T
V
OO
O
U
R
O
V
E
NE
E
R
R
N
O
C
M
Y
L
T
E
2
I V
/
E
3
TU
E
N
T
R
NE
M
T
V
I
A
S
N
E
N
P
E
A
C
A
R
P
A
X
T
L
O
U
L
C
U
T
E
O
L
N
D D
G
C T
E
ST
A
I I
N
T
T S O
S
P
A
T
R
C
S
M
S
R
E
T
T
O
H
E
U
R
U
C
L
D
L
S
T
M L
S
T
U
I
S
V
EV
I
S
E
O
H
C
B
T
N
C
S
B
PE
T
E
.
IF
D
I
H
E
U
G
A
I
R
L
T
T
D
NAL
T
N
V
E
L
R
I T
D
E
I
T
E
N
UR
C
T
F
S
I
O
H
S
EL
S
N
V
T O X
H
O
O
P
D
P
C
L
H
H
D
M
A
S B
M S
UT
S
E
T
c
E
A
h
M
E
N
R
D
O M
ECEIV
A
DV
R C
R
Y
C
D
A
ST
H
D
CC
E
A
R
D
E
V
O
.
ER
S
S .
U
D
RR I R E C T
XM
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
IR receiver
(
VIDEO/GAME
41
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
Different sources can be playing in three zones at the same time or, depending on your needs, the same source can also be used (however, if iPod, HOME MEDIA GALLERY (VSX-94TXH only), XM or SIRIUS Radio is selected in the main zone, it cannot also be selected in the sub zone). The main and sub zones have independent power (the main zone power can be off while one (or both) of the sub zones is on) and the sub zones can be controlled by the remote or front panel controls. However, you may need to specify the volume settings in ZONE Audio Setup on page 69.
Making MULTI-ZONE connections
It is possible to make these connections if you have a separate TV and speakers for your primary (ZONE 2) sub
zone, and a separate amplifier secondary (ZONE 3) sub zone. You will also need a separate amplifier if you are not using the Surround Back System setup (see below) for your primary sub zone. There are two primary sub zone setups possible with this system. Choose whichever works best for you.
1
(and speakers) for your
AUDIO
ANTENNA
PHONO
AM LOOP
FM UNBAL 75
IR
IN
ZONE2ZONE2
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
R L
CD
IN
OUT
MONI­TOR
MONI-
DVD/LD
OUT
TOR
(
)
DVD/LD
OUT
IN
(BD)
ASSIGN-
OUT
ABLE
BD
21
IN
CD-R/ TAPE/
OUT
MD
TV/SAT
Y
IN
1
IN
IN
R
VIDEO /
P
B
GAME 1
2
IN
IN
CENTE
SUB W.
OUT
P
R
SUR-
DVR/
ROUND
VCR 1
3
IN
IN
Y
OUT
P
B
DVR/
SURROUND BACK
VCR 2
P
R
IN
1
12 V TRIGGER
1)
R L
( DC OUT 12V/
31
)
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
S-VIDEO
VIDEO AUDIO
MULTI-ZONE listening options
The following table shows what you can listen to in each sub zone:
Sub Zone Input sources available
ZONE2 iPod, XM or SIRIUS Radio, the built-in tuner
and other analog audio sources. sources, only composite video is possible. Please note that the XM/SIRIUS Radio function is not available for sub zone (ZONE2) listening when using the MULTI-ZONE feature with the VSX-92TXH.
ZONE3 Only digital audio sources (the input source
a.With the MULTI CH IN input, sound is output only from the front L/R channels.
Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (
must already be assigned using the The Input Setup menu on page 67) are available.
ZONE 2
1 Connect a separate amplifier to the SOURCE OUT
L
LLRR
ZONE & SOURCE MONITOR OUT rear of this receiver.
2
jacks and a TV monitor to the
jacks, both on the
a
)
MULTI-ZONE &
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration.
Sub zone Main zone
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
MULTI-ZONE
/REC SEL
& SOURCE
OUT1
FM UNBAL 75
ZONE3
IN
IR
1
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
OPTICAL
1
IN (TV/
2
IN (BD)
3
IN (
DVR/ VCR 1
4
IN (
CD-R
ASSIGN­ABLE
IN (
DVD/ LD
IN
COAXIAL
XM
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
MAIN
OUT
IN
2
ZONE2
HDMI
MONI­TOR
MONI-
1
IN
OUT
TOR
(
)
1
DVD/LD
CONTROL
IN
OUT
(BD)
2
IN
IN
ASSIGN-
)
SAT
ABLE
21
OUT
2
IN
1
OUT
IN
Y
Y
1
IN
(
DVD/
)
)
LD
3
IN
B
B
P
P
2
IN
)
1
4
P
R
P
R
2
1
1
4
IN
3
2
IN
IN
)
Y
Y
(CD)
2
(BD)
B
B
P
P
OUT
IN
P
R
P
R
ASSIGNABLE
(
1)
VIDEO/GAME
41
ASSIGNABLE
31
S-VIDEO
VIDEO AUDI O
DIGITAL
COMPONENT VIDEO
Surround Back System MULTI-ZONE setup (
You must select ZONE 2 in Surround back speaker setting on page 39 to use this setup. Note that the sound in the sub zone will be temporarily interrupted when controlling the main zone (for example, changing the input source or starting playback).
With video
MULTI-
A
ANTENNA
PHON
AM LOOP
IN
ZONE2ZONE2
R L
CD
IN
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
OUT
BD
IN
CD-R/ TAPE/ MD
TV/SAT
IN
IN
R
R
VIDEO / GAME 1
IN
SUB W.
OUT
SUR-
DVR/
ROUN
VCR 1
IN
R
OUT
DVR/
SU
VCR 2
IN
1
R L
(
DC O
TOTAL
ZONE 2
08
)
Note
1 You can’t use sound controls (such as the tone controls or Midnight listening) or any surround modes with a separate amplifier in the sub zone. You can, however, use the features available with your sub zone amplifier.
59
En
Page 60
08
SELECTABLE
L RL
( Single
)
B
FM UNBAL 75
MONI­TOR OUT
MONI­TOR OUT
DVD/LD
CONTROL
OUT
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
ZONE2
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
IR
(
DVD/LD
)
(BD)
ASSIGN­ABLE
IN
1
IN
2
C
C TA M
I
S
S R
O
P
I
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
IN
1
IN
2
ZONE2
MAIN
HDMI
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
LAN (10/100)
Other connections
• Connect a TV monitor to the SOURCE MONITOR OUT
MULTI-ZONE &
jacks on the rear of this
receiver.
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the surround back speaker terminals as shown below.
Sub zone Main zone
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
MULTI-ZONE
/REC SEL
& SOURCE
OUT1
FM UNBAL 75
ZONE3
IN
IR
1
OUT2
MAIN
OUT
IN
2
LAN (10/100)
ZONE2
HDMI
MONI­TOR
OPTICAL
1
IN
OUT
(
)
1
DVD/LD
CONTROL
IN
(BD)
2
IN
1
IN
IN
ASSIGN-
(TV/
)
SAT
ABLE
21
OUT
2
IN
2
IN
(BD)
1
OUT
IN
Y
Y
3
IN ( DVR/
( DVD/
)
VCR 1
)
LD
3
IN
4
B
B
P
P
IN (
)
CD-R
1
4
ASSIGN­ABLE
P
R
P
R
1
1
2
IN ( DVD/
4
IN
3
2
IN
IN
)
LD
Y
Y
(CD)
2
IN
(BD)
COAXIAL
B
B
P
P
OUT
IN
P
R
P
R
XM
ASSIGNABLE
(
1)
VIDEO/GAME
41
ASSIGNABLE
31
S-VIDEO
DIGITAL
COMPONENT VIDEO
Secondary MULTI-ZONE setup (
• Connect a separate amplifier to the
ANTENNA
AM LOOP
ZONE2ZONE2
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
R
L
OUT
MONI-
DVD/LD TOR OUT
IN
BD IN
CD-R/ TAPE/ MD
TV/SAT
1
IN
IN
VIDEO /
GAME 1
2
IN
IN
OUT
DVR/ VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/ VCR 2
IN
R L
VIDEO AUDIO
ZONE 3
PRE OUT
AUDIO
LR
PHONO
FRONT
IN
CENTER
SUB W. CD
IN
SUR­ROUND
SUR­ROUND BACK
OUT
(
)
Single
LR
SIRIUS
IN
R
L
IN
LLRR
SPEAKERS
FRONT
FRONT
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK /
A
IN
RL RLRL
CENTER
SUB W.
SUR-
iPod
ROUND
SURROUND BACK
RS-232C
1
2
MULTI CH IN
12 V TRIGGER
( DC OUT 12V/
)
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
)
OUT1 ZONE3
SWITCHED 100 W(0.8 A) MAX
SELECTABLE
AC OUTLET
B
(
)
Single
digital output on the rear of this receiver.
The amplifier must have an optical digital input to make this connection. This will allow you to hear the digital
1
)
B
R
2
B
R
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
1
ANTENNA
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
AM LOOP
FM UNBAL 75
IR
ZONE2ZONE2
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
L
R
OUT
MONI­TOR
MONI-
OUT
DVD/LD
TOR
(
)
1
DVD/LD
IN
OUT
IN
(BD)
2
IN
ASSIGN­ABLE
BD
21
IN
OUT
TV/SAT
Y
I
1
IN
IN
VIDEO /
P
B
GAME 1
2
IN
IN
OUT
P
R
DVR/
VCR 1
3
IN
IN
Y
OUT
P
B
DVR/
VCR 2
P
R
IN
(
1)
VIDEO/GAME
R L
31
S-VIDEO
VIDEO AUDIO
output of a component in a second sub zone.
Sub zone (ZONE 3)
DIGITAL IN
Main zone
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
IN
1
OUT2
MAIN
IN
2
LAN (10/100)
ZONE2
HDMI
OPTICAL
1
IN
CONTROL
1
IN
IN
(TV/
)
SAT
OUT
2
IN
2
IN
(BD)
IN
Y
3
IN ( DVR/
( DVD/
)
VCR 1
LD
3
IN
4
P
IN (
)
CD-R
4
1
ASSIGN­ABLE
P
1
2
1
IN ( DVD/
4
IN
IN
)
LD
Y
(CD)
2
IN
(BD)
COAXIAL
P
OUT
IN
P
XM
ASSIGNABLE
41
DIGITAL
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls
The following steps use the front panel controls to adjust the sub zone volume and select sources.
ZONE remote controls below.
AUDIO VIDEO
PHONES
(ST) (ST)
SETUP
STANDBY/ON
INPUT
SELECTOR
1 Press the
PARAMETER
(TUNE)
ENTER
(TUNE)
TUNER EDITSPEAKERS BAND
USB
RETURN
ADVANCED
PHASE
MCACC
CONTROL
PHASE
AUTO SURR/
MCACC
CONTROL
STREAM DIRECT
POSITION
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE ON/OFF
MCACC
SETUP MIC
DIGITAL PRECISION
PROCESSING
MULTI – ZONE &
SOURCE/REC SEL
CONTROL ON/OFF
on the front panel.
Each press selects a MULTI-ZONE option:
ZONE 2 ON – Selects your primary (ZONE 2) sub zone
ZONE 2&3 ON – Select both sub zones
ZONE 3 ON – Selects your secondary (ZONE 3) sub zone
MULTI ZONE OFF – Switches the MULTI-ZONE feature off
The MULTI-ZONE indicator lights when the MULTI-ZONE control has been switched ON.
2 Press CONTROL to select the sub zone(s) you want.
If you selected ZONE 2&3 ON above, you can toggle between ZONE 2 and ZONE 3.
• When the receiver is on,
4
make sure that any operations for the sub zone are done while ZONE and your selected sub zone(s) show in the display. If this is not showing, the front panel controls affect the main zone only.
3Use the
INPUT SELECTOR
dial to select the source
for the zone you have selected.
For example, ZONE 2 CD-R sends the source connected to the CD-R inputs to the primary (ZONE 2) sub room.
•If you select TUNER, you can use the TUNER controls to select a preset station (see Saving station presets
on page 35 if you’re unsure how to do this).
2
See MULTI-
SIGNAL SELECT
PROCESSING
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO L RAUDIO
DIGITAL VIDEO
SCALER HDMI
HOME
STANDARD
ADVANCED
THX
SURROUND
SURROUND
SB ch
STEREO/ F.S.SURR
VSX-94TXH
button
5
MASTER VOLUME
3
60
En
Note
1 Only one sub zone is possible if you connect the OUT1 ZONE3 digital output to your second sub zone. 2 When you use ZONE 2, you must set ZONE 2 / RECSEL Setting in the ZONE Audio Setup menu to ZONE 2 (page 69). 3 Note that when recording, this also selects the RECOUT input source. See Making an audio or a video recording on page 73 for more on this. 4 If the receiver is in standby, the display is dimmed, and ZONE and your selected sub zone(s) continue to show in the display. 5 The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time. Therefore, changing the station in one zone also changes the station in the other zone. Please be careful not to change stations when recording a radio broadcast.
Page 61
Other connections
FM UNBAL
MONI- TOR OUT
MON TOR OUT
CONTROL
Y Y
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
M
1
IN
2
ZONE2
ZONE2
MAIN
(
DVD/ LD
)
IN
OUT
1
IN
1
IN
2
HDMI
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
IR
(
DVD/LD
)
(BD)
ASSIGN­ABLE
IN
1
IN
2
IN
21
08
• You can’t use the iPod, HOME MEDIA GALLERY (VSX-94TXH only), XM and SIRIUS Radio functions simultaneously using the MULTI-ZONE feature.
4Use the
MASTER VOLUME
dial to adjust the
volume.
This is only possible if you selected the VARIABLE volume control in ZONE Audio Setup on page 69.
1
5 When you’re finished, press CONTROL again to return to the main zone controls. You can also press the MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE ON/ OFF button on the front panel to switch off all output to
the sub zone(s).
2
MULTI-ZONE remote controls
The following table shows the possible MULTI-ZONE remote controls:
Button What it does
SHIFT+ RECEIVER
Selects the sub zone you want to control, shown in the display as RCV/Z2 (ZONE2) or RCV/Z3 (ZONE3).
Switches on/off power in the currently selected sub zone.
INPUT SELECT
Input source buttons
VOL +/–
Use to select the input source in the currently selected sub zone.
Use to select the input source directly (this may not work for some functions) in the currently selected sub zone.
Use to set the listening volume in the currently selected sub zone (ZONE2 only).
1 Connect the IR receiver sensor to the
(
& SOURCE IR IN
MAIN ZONE
) jack on the rear of this
MULTI-ZONE
receiver.
If you also plan to use a separate IR receiver in the sub room, connect this to the ZONE2 jack.
Closet or shelving unit
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
IR
OUT
(
)
1
DVD/LD
IN
(BD)
2
IN
ASSIGN­ABLE
21
OUT
Y
P
B
PR
3
IN
Y
P
B
PR
(
1)
VIDEO/GAME
31
AM LOOP
FM UNBAL 75
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
R
OUT
MONI- TOR
MONI-
OUT
DVD/LD TOR OUT
IN
BD IN
TV/SAT
1
IN
IN
VIDEO /
GAME 1
2
IN
IN
OUT
DVR/ VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/ VCR 2
IN
S-VIDEO
VIDEO AUDIO
Non-Pioneer component
Pioneer component
PRE OUT
AUDIO
ANTENNA
LR
PHONO
FRONT
IN
ZONE2ZONE2
CENTER
L
SUB W.
CD
IN
SUR­ROUND
SUR­ROUND BACK
OUT
(
)
Single
CD-R/
LR
TAPE/ MD
SIRIUS
IN
R
L
IN
LLRR
SPEAKERS
FRONT
A
IN
RL
CENTER
SUB W.
SUR-
iPod
ROUND
SURROUND BACK
RS-232C
1
2
MULTI CH IN
12 V TRIGGER
R L
( DC OUT 12V/
)
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
FRONT
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
OPTICAL
1
IN
(TV/
SAT
2
IN
(BD)
3
IN
( DVR/ VCR 1
4
IN
( CD-R
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
IN
( DVD/
)
LD
2
IN
COAXIAL
XM
IR
IN
CONTROL
IN OUT
HDMI
1
IN
)
2
IN
)
3
IN
)
4
1
2
1
4
IN
(CD)
OUT
IN
ASSIGNABLE
41
DIGITAL
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
CONTROL
IN
OUT
IN
Y
( DVD/ LD
P
PR
IN
Y
(BD)
P
PR
1
)
B
2
B
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
IR receiver
2 Connect the IR IN jack of another component to the MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE IR OUT
jack on the rear of this
receiver to link it to the IR receiver.
Please see the manual supplied with your IR receiver for the type of cable necessary for the connection.
• If you want to link a Pioneer component to the IR receiver, see Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s sensor on page 82 to connect to the CONTROL jacks instead of the IR OUT jack.
Connecting an IR receiver
If you keep your stereo components in a closed cabinet or shelving unit, or you wish to use the sub zone remote control in another zone, you can use an optional IR receiver (such as a Niles or Xantech unit) to control your system instead of the remote sensor on the front panel of
this receiver.
3
Switching components on and off using the 12 volt trigger
You can connect components in your system (such as a screen or projector) to this receiver so that they switch on or off using 12 volt triggers when you select an input function. However, you must specify which input functions switch on the trigger using the The Input Setup menu on page 67. Note that this will only work with components that have a standby mode.
Note
1 The volume levels of the main and sub zones are independent. 2 • You won’t be able to switch the main zone off completely unless you’ve switched off the MULTI-ZONE control first.
• If you don’t plan to use the MULTI-ZONE feature for awhile, turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so that this receiver is in standby.
3 • Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver remote sensor window.
• Note that other manufacturers may not use the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that came with your component to check for IR compatibility.
• If using two remote controls (at the same time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor on the front panel.
61
En
Page 62
08
SUB W.
CENTER
P
A
O
U
Other connections
12V
TRIGGER
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
VIDEO AUDIO
R L
SUR­ROUND
SURROUND BACK
1
12 V TRIGGER
(
DC OUT 12V/ TOTAL 50 mA MAX
iPod
LR
RS-232C
2
MULTI CH IN
)
• Connect the 12 V TRIGGER jack of this receiver to the 12 V trigger of another component.
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the connection.
• The trigger maximum power is DC OUT 12 V/50 mA.
After you’ve specified the input functions that will switch on the trigger, you’ll be able to switch the component on or off just by pressing the input function(s) you’ve set on page 67.
Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display
If you have a Pioneer plasma display, you can use an SR+ cable
of various convenient features, such as automatic video input switching of the plasma display when the input is
changed.
1
to connect it to this unit and take advantage
2
Important
• You can’t use the SR+ features when HDMI Control is set to ON. Make sure to set HDMI Control to OFF when you use the SR+ features (page 66).
• If you connect to a Pioneer plasma display using an SR+ cable, you will need to point the remote control at the plasma display remote sensor to control the receiver. In this case, you won’t be able to control the receiver using the remote control if you switch the plasma display off.
• Before you can use the extra SR+ features, you need to make a few settings in the receiver. See The Input
Setup menu on page 67 and SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays on page 69 for detailed instructions.
• Use a 3-ringed miniplug SR+ cable to connect the CONTROL IN OUT
jack of your plasma display.
jack of this receiver with the
VIDEO
INPUT 1
Pioneer plasma
display
CONTROL
VIDEO
INPUT 2
62
En
DVD player
Satellite receiver, etc
CONTROL
OUT
DVD/LD
AUDIO IN
Pioneer plasma
display
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
OPTICAL
1
IN (TV/
)
SAT
2
IN (BD)
3
IN (
DVR/
)
VCR 1
4
IN (
)
CD-R
1
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
1
IN
(
DVD/
)
LD
(CD)
2
IN
COAXIAL
IN
XM
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
IN
IR
1
ZONE2
MAIN
OUT
IN
2
ZONE2
HDMI
1
IN
2
IN
3
IN
4
2
4
IN
OUT
41
CONTROL
IN IN
IN
OUT
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
)
LD
B
P
P
R
2
IN
Y
(BD)
B
P
P
R
(
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
(
1
DVD/LD
(BD)
2
ASSIGN­ABLE
VIDEO/GAME
MONI­TOR OUT
)
21
OUT
Y
B
P
P
R
3
IN
Y
B
P
P
R
1)
31
S-VIDEO
FM UNBAL 75
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
MONI­TOR OUT
1
IN
2
IN
VIDEO A
AM LOO
Z
R
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
BD IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO / GAME 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
R
To make the most of the SR+ features, you should connect your source components (DVD player, etc.) in a slightly different way to that described in this chapter. For each component, connect the video output directly to the plasma display, and just connect the audio (analog and/ or digital) to this receiver.
STANDBY/ON
PHASE
ADVANCED
CONTROL
MCACC
PHASE
AUTO SURR/
MCACC
CONTROL
STREAM DIRECT
INPUT
SELECTOR
POSITION
DIGITAL VIDEO
DIGITAL PRECISION
SCALER HDMI
PROCESSING
HOME
STANDARD
ADVANCED
THX
SURROUND
SURROUND
This receiver
SAT
AUDIO IN
VSX-94TXH
MASTER VOLUME
Note
1 The 3-ringed SR+ cable from Pioneer is commercially available under the part number ADE7095. Contact the Pioneer Customer Support division for more information on obtaining an SR+ cable (you can also use a commercially available 3-ringed mini phone plug for the connection). 2 This receiver is compatible with all SR+ equipped Pioneer plasma displays from 2003 onward.
Page 63
Other connections
08
Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer plasma display
When connected using an SR+ cable, a number of features become available to make using this receiver with your Pioneer plasma display even easier. These features include:
• On-screen displays when making receiver settings, such as speaker setup, MCACC setup, and so on.
• On-screen volume display.
• On-screen display of listening mode.
• Automatic video input switching on the plasma display.
• Automatic volume muting on the plasma display.
See also SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays on page 69 for more on setting up the receiver.
Important
• The SR+ features do not work when any of the iPod, HOME MEDIA GALLERY (VSX-94TXH only), XM, or SIRIUS Radio function is selected.
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER TOP MENU
BAND
SETUPSETUP
PROGRAM
CATEGORY
SLEEP
+
SR
CLEAR +
10
TUNE
ST ST
TUNE
GUIDE
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
XM RADIO
HDMI
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
BD TV CTRL
SIRIUS
TUNER
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
DVD TV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
1 Make sure that the plasma display and this receiver are switched on and that they are connected with the SR+ cable.
See Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display above for more on connecting these components.
• Make sure you have also selected the display input to which you’ve connected the receiver in The Input Setup menu on page 67.
2 To switch SR+ mode on/off, press the SR+ button.
The front panel display shows SR+ ON or SR+ OFF.
• The automatic video input switching and the automatic volume muting features are enabled separately; see SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays on page 69.
DIMMER
GENRE
CLASS
CH
ENTER
LEVEL
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
ENTER
RETURNRETURN
RECEIVER
ANALOG ATT
DISC
, then
Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output
When using the Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional (see page 42) to calibrate the reverb characteristics of your listening room, you can graphically check the results on your computer connected to this receiver. Also, when the Full Band Phase Control function is activated, you can visually check the calibrated characteristics of group delay of the speakers and the corrected characteristics of group delay processed by the exclusive correction filter by installing the corresponding PC application on your computer. Use a commercially-available RS-232C cable to connect the RS-232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C jack on the back panel of this receiver (the cable must be cross type, female–female).
The software to output the results is available from the support area of the Pioneer website (http:// www.pioneerelectronics.com/pna/ci/codes/ 0,,2076_262707270,00.html). Instructions for using the software are also available here. If you have any questions regarding, please contact the Customer Support Division of Pioneer.
Please make sure your system meets the following requirements:
• Operating system must be Windows Windows
®
XP, Windows® 2000, Windows® Millennium Edition, Windows Windows
®
NT 4.0 (Service pack 6).
• CPU must be at least Pentium 3 / 300 MHz or AMD K6 / 300 MHz (or equivalent) with at least 128 MB of memory, and your monitor must be able to display a minimum resolution of 800x600.
• An RS-232C port connector is necessary for graphical output. Refer to the operating instructions and/or the PC manufacturer for more information on making the proper port settings.
• System must have internet access.
• Connect your computer to the RS-232C jack on the rear panel of the receiver.
Make sure that the receiver and all connected components are switched off and disconnected from the
power outlet when you do this.
1
®
Vista,
®
98 Second Edition, or
Note
1 Make sure that you do this before continuing to the Reverb Measurement option in Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 43 (measurement data is cleared if you switch off the power).
63
En
Page 64
08
Other connections
Use a commercially-available cable to connect the RS­232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C jack on this receiver. See the documentation provided with the Advanced MCACC application for more information.
RS-232C
Personal computer
Advanced MCACC output using your PC
Before continuing, make sure you have completed step 1 in Data Management on page 45. Note that transmission data is erased when the receiver is turned off.
1 Select ‘Output PC’ and press When the receiver is ready for transmission, Start the MCACC application on your PC shows on the OSD.
ENTER
.
DVD/LD
5. Data Management
a. MCACC Data Check b. Memory Rename c. MCACC Memory Copy d. MCACC Memory Clear
e. Output PC
-
55.0
:Return
dB
DVD/LD
5e. Output PC
Start the MCACC application on your PC.
-
55.0
:Cancel
dB
2 Start the MCACC application on your computer.
Follow the instructions provided with the application. It will take about ten seconds for the transmission to complete, then you will be able to analyze the output on your computer. Since the data will be cleared from the receiver when you restart reverb measurement or turn off the receiver, you might want to save the information on your PC after measurement.
3 When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You will return to the Data Management menu. Continue with other settings in the Data Management menu if necessary. Press RETURN again to exit the Data Management menu.
64
En
Page 65
HDMI Control
C
A
E
Chapter 9
HDMI Control
09
By connecting this receiver to an HDMI Control­compatible Pioneer plasma display or the HDD/DVD recorder with an HDMI cable, you can control this receiver from the remote control of a connected plasma display, as well as have the connected plasma display automatically change inputs in response to operations carried out on this unit.
Refer to the operating manual for your plasma display for more information about which operations can be carried out by connecting via HDMI cable.
• You cannot use this function with components that do not support HDMI Control.
• We cannot guarantee this unit will work with HDMI Control-compatible components other than those made by Pioneer.
Making the HDMI Control connections
You can use synchronized operation for a connected plasma display and up to four other components (including a maximum of two recorders or players).
Be sure to connect the plasma display’s audio cable to the audio input of this unit.
Important
• When connecting this system or changing connections, be sure to switch the power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket. After completing all connections, connect the power cords to the wall socket.
• After connecting this receiver to an AC outlet, a 15 second initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any operations during initialization. The HDMI indicator on the display unit blinks during initialization, and you can turn this receiver on once it has stopped blinking.
• To get the most out of this function, we recommend that you connect your HDMI component not to a plasma display but rather directly to the HDMI terminal on this receiver.
HDMI Control-compatible
HDD/DVD Recorder
HDMI OUT
MULTI-ZONE
OPTICAL
XM
& SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
1
IN (TV/
SAT
2
IN (BD)
3
IN (
DVR/
VCR 1
4
IN (
CD-R
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
IN (
DVD/
)
LD
2
IN
COAXIAL
IN
)
)
)
1
1
(CD)
4
2
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
41
HDMI
1
IN
2
IN
3
IN
4
IN
OUT
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
CONTROL
IN
OUT
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
)
LD
B
P
PR
2
IN
Y
(BD)
B
P
PR
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
1
IN
2
IN
(
VIDEO/GAME
(
DVD/LD (BD)
ASSIGN­ABLE
IR
OUT
MONI­TOR OUT
)
21
OUT
Y
B
P
PR
3
IN
Y
B
P
PR
1)
31
S-VIDEO
DIGITAL OUT
HDMI IN
HDMI Control-compatible Pioneer plasma display
FM UNBAL 75
MONI- TOR OUT
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
1
IN
2
IN
VIDEO AUDIO
VSX-94TXH
ANTENNA
AM LOOP
ZONE2ZONE2
R
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
BD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO / GAME 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
R L
AUDIORL
AV OUT
PHONO
IN
L
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/ TAPE/ MD
IN
SUB W.
SUR­ROUND
AUDIO
R
R
R
SURROUND B
1
12 V TRIGG
(
DC OUT 12V/ TOTAL 50 mA MAX
)
65
En
Page 66
09
HDMI Control
Setting the HDMI options
You must adjust the settings of this receiver as well as HDMI Control-compatible connected components in order to make use of the HDMI Control function. For more information see the operating instructions for each component.
3 Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is connected to this receiver, and see if video output from connected components displays properly on the screen on not.
4 Check whether the components connected to all HDMI inputs are properly displayed.
Setting the HDMI Control mode
Choose whether to set this unit’s HDMI Control function ON or OFF. You will need to set it to ON to use the HDMI Control function.
• When using a TV not manufactured by Pioneer, put this setting to OFF.
1 Press RECEIVER on the remote control, then press the SETUP button.
2 Select ‘Other Setup’ then press ENTER.
3 Select ‘HDMI Control Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.
DVD/LD
8. Other Setup
a. Multi Ch In Setup b. ZONE Audio Setup c. SR+ Setup
d. HDMI Control Setup
e. OSD Adjustment
4 Select the ‘
-
55.0
dB
:Return
HDMI Control
DVD/LD
8d. HDMI Control Setup
HDMI Control OFF
’ setting you want.
-
55.0
:Finish
dB
ON – Enables the HDMI Control function. When this unit’s power is turned off and you have a supported source begin playback while using the HDMI Control function, the audio and video output from the HDMI
connection are output from the plasma display.
1
OFF – The HDMI Control is disabled. Synchronized operations cannot be used. When this unit’s power is turned off, audio and video of sources connected via HDMI are not output.
5 When you’re finished, press SETUP.
You will finish to System Setup menu.
Before using synchronization
Once you have finished all connections and settings, you must:
1 Put all components into standby mode.
2 Turn the power ON for all components, with the power for the plasma display being turned on last.
Synchronized amp mode
Synchronized amp mode begins once you carry out an operation for the plasma display. For more information, see the operating manual of your plasma display.
Synchronized amp mode operations
By connecting a component to this receiver with an HDMI cable you can use synchronized amp mode, which allows you to synchronize the following operations:
•Displays on the plasma display when you mute or adjust the volume of this receiver.
• The input of this receiver is automatically changed when playback occurs on a connected component.
• Even if you change this receiver’s input to a device that is not connected by HDMI, the synchronized amp mode remains in effect.
• By pressing GENRE when listening to a source from a HDD/DVD recorder, the most appropriate listening mode is automatically selected (see Using the genre synchronizing function on page 33 for more on this).
Canceling synchronized amp mode
If you cancel synchronized amp mode while connected via HDMI to a plasma display or while you are watching a TV programme, the power for this unit is turned off.
About HDMI Control
• Connect the plasma display directly to this receiver. Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational errors.
• Only connect components you intend to use as a source to the HDMI input of this receiver. Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational errors.
66
En
Note
1• When HDMI Control is set to ON, the audio/video signals input at the HDMI IN terminals are output at the HDMI OUT terminal even when this receiver is switched off.
• With HDMI Control set to ON, Input Setup and HDMI Input are automatically set to OFF.
Page 67
Other Settings
Chapter 10:
Other Settings
4 Select the input function that you want to set up.
The Input Setup menu
You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu if you didn’t hook up your digital equipment according to the default settings (see Input function default and possible settings below). In this case, you need to tell the receiver what equipment is hooked up to which terminal so the buttons on the remote control correspond to the components you’ve connected.
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
XM RADIO
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
BD TV CTRL
SIRIUS
TUNER
HDMI
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
DVD TV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
SETUPSETUP
PROGRAM
CATEGORY
TV VOL
GUIDE
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV. Use the  RECEIVER button to switch on.
2Press the
SETUP
RECEIVER
button.
on the remote control, then press
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the /// buttons and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm and exit the current menu.
3 Select ‘Input Setup’ from the System Setup menu.
DVD/LD
System Setup MENU
1. Auto MCACC
2. Surr Back System
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
5. Data Management
6. Manual SP Setup
7. Input Setup
8. Other Setup
Note
1 For high-definition video (using component video connections), or when digital video conversion is switched off (in Setting the Video options on page 72), you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component. 2 You will have to make an SR+ cable connection from a CONTROL OUT jack on the display to the CONTROL IN jack on this receiver (opposite from the setup in Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display on page 62). Note that to control this receiver using the remote, you will have to point it at the plasma display’s remote sensor after making this connection.
-
:Exit
55.0
dB
DVD/LD
7. Input Setup (1/2)
Input DVD Digital In [ COAX-1 ] HDMI Input [ Input-1 ] Component In [ Comp-3 ] S-Video In [ Input-1 ]
CLEAR +
10
TUNE
ST ST
ENTER
TUNE
TV CONTROL
INPUT
TV CH
SELECT
( Next )
CH LEVEL
CLASS
ENTER
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
RETURNRETURN
VOL
-
55.0
:Finish
DISC
dB
The default names correspond with the names next to the terminals on the rear panel (such as DVD/LD or VIDEO/ GAME 1) which, in turn, correspond with the names on the remote control.
( Next )
-
:Finish
DVD/LD
7. Input Setup (1/2)
Input DVD Digital In [ COAX-1 ] HDMI Input [ Input-1 ] Component In [ Comp-3 ] S-Video In [ Input-1 ]
DVD/LD
55.0
dB
7. Input Setup (2/2)
Input Name Rename 12V Trigger1 [ OFF ] 12V Trigger2 [ OFF ] PDP In (SR+) [ OFF ]
ENTER : Next
( Back)
DVD/LD
-
55.0
:Finish
dB
5 Select the input(s) to which you’ve connected your component.
For example, if your DVD player only has an optical output, you will need to change the DVD/LD input function’s Digital In setting from COAX 1 (default) to the optical input you’ve connected it to.The numbering (OPT1 to 4) corresponds with the numbers beside the inputs on the back of the receiver.
• If you change the setting to an input that has been previously assigned to another function (for example, TV) then the setting for that function will automatically be switched off.
• If your component is connected via a component video cable to an input terminal other than the default, you must tell the receiver which input terminal your component is connected to, or else you may see the S-video or composite video signals
instead of the component video signals.
1
6 When you’re finished, select ‘Next’ to continue to the next screen.
The second screen of the Input setup has three optional settings:
Input Name – You can choose to rename the input function for easier identification. Select Rename to do so, or Default to return to the system default.
12V Trigger 1 / 2 – After connecting a component to one of the 12 volt triggers (see Switching components on and off using the 12 volt trigger on page 61), select MAIN, ZONE 2, ZONE 3 or OFF for the corresponding trigger setting to switch it on automatically along with the (main or sub) zone specified.
PDP In (SR+) – To control certain functions on this receiver from a plasma display, select the display
input to which you’ve connected the receiver.
2
10
67
En
Page 68
10
Other Settings
7 When you're finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the System Setup menu.
Input function default and possible settings
The terminals on the rear of the receiver generally correspond to the name of one of the input source functions. If you have connected components to this receiver differently from (or in addition to) the defaults below, see The Input Setup menu above to tell the receiver how you’ve connected up. The dots () indicate possible assignments.
Input source
DVD/LD
BD OPT 2
TV/SAT OPT 1
DVR/VCR1 OPT 3
DVR/VCR2
VIDEO/ GAME1
VIDEO/ GAME2
HDMI 1
HDMI 2 (
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
(VSX-94TXH)
HOME MEDIA GALLERY
(VSX-94TXH)
XM
SIRIUS
CD
CD-R/TAPE/ MD
TUNER
PHONO
MULTI CH IN
iPod
a.With HDMI Control set to ON, assignments cannot be made (see HDMI Control on page 65).
Digital
COAX 1
(Fixed)
COAX 2
OPT 4
Input Terminals
HDMI
(
HDMI-1
HDMI-2
(
HDMI-3
HDMI-4
(
Component
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
)
)
)
)
S-Video
IN 1 IN 1
IN 2 IN 2

(Fixed)
(Fixed)
IN 3
(Fixed)
The Other Setup menu
The Other Setup menu is where you can make customized settings to reflect how you are using the receiver.
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
XM RADIO
GALLERY
BD TV CTRL
SIRIUS
TUNER
HDMI
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
DVD TV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
HOME MEDIA
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER TOP MENU
BAND
SETUPSETUP
CATEGORY
TV VOL
PROGRAM
GUIDE
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV. Use the  RECEIVER button to switch on.
2 Press the
SETUP
RECEIVER
button.
on the remote control, then press
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the /// buttons and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm and exit the current menu.
3 Select ‘Other Setup’ then press
DVD/LD
System Setup MENU
1. Auto MCACC
2. Surr Back System
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
5. Data Management
6. Manual SP Setup
7. Input Setup
8. Other Setup
-
55.0
:Exit
DVD/LD
dB
8. Other Setup
a. Multi Ch In Setup
b. ZONE Audio Setup c. SR+ Setup d. HDMI Control Setup e. OSD Adjustment
4 Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to adjust these settings in order:
Multi Ch In Setup – Specifies the optional settings for a multi-channel input.
ZONE Audio Setup – Specify your volume setting for a MULTI-ZONE setup (see ZONE Audio Setup below).
SR+ Setup – Specify how you want to control your Pioneer plasma display (see SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays below).
HDMI Control Setup – Synchronizes this receiver with your Pioneer component supporting HDMI Control (see Setting the HDMI Control mode on page 66).
OSD Adjustment – Adjust the position of the on­screen display on your TV (see OSD Adjustment below).
5 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.
CLEAR +
10
TUNE
ST ST
ENTER
TUNE
TV CONTROL
INPUT
TV CH
SELECT
ENTER
CH LEVEL
CLASS
DISC
ENTER
V PARAMETER MENU T.EDIT
RETURNRETURN
VOL
.
-
55.0
:Return
dB
68
En
Page 69
Other Settings
10
Multi Channel Input Setup
You can adjust the level of the subwoofer for a multi­channel input. Also, when the multi-channel input is selected as an input source, you can display the video images of other input sources. In the Multi Channel Input Setup, you can assign a video input to the multi-channel input.
1 Select ‘
Multi Ch In Setup
’ from the Other Setup
menu.
2 Select the ‘
DVD/LD
8. Other Setup
a. Multi Ch In Setup
b. ZONE Audio Setup c. SR+ Setup d. HDMI Control Setup e. OSD Adjustment
SW Input Gain
-
55.0
dB
:Return
’ setting you want.
0dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level originally recorded on the source.
+10dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level increased by 10 dB.
3 Select the ‘
DVD/LD
8a. Multi Ch In Setup
SW Input Gain 0dB
Video Input [ DVD ]
Video Input
-
55.0
dB
:Finish
’ setting you want.
When the multi-channel input is selected as an input source, you can display the video images of other input sources. The video input can be selected from the following: DVD/LD, BD, TV/SAT, DVR/VCR1, DVR/ VCR2, VIDEO/GAME1, VIDEO/GAME2.
DVD/LD
8a. Multi Ch In Setup
SW Input Gain [ 0dB ]
Video Input BD
4 When you’re finished, press
-
55.0
dB
:Finish
RETURN
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
ZONE Audio Setup
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see MULTI­ZONE listening on page 59) you may need to specify your
volume setting.
1 Select ‘ZONE Audio Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.
DVD/LD
8. Other Setup
a. Multi Ch In Setup
b. ZONE Audio Setup
c. SR+ Setup d. HDMI Control Setup e. OSD Adjustment
-
55.0
:Return
DVD/LD
dB
8b. ZONE Audio Setup
ZONE 2 / RECSEL Setting RECSEL ZONE 2 Volume Level [ Variable ]
-
55.0
:Finish
dB
2 Select the ‘ZONE 2 / RECSEL Setting’ you want.
You can select the ZONE 2 or RECSEL setting.
ZONE 2 – Sound is output from MULTI ZONE & SOURCE ZONE2 OUT jack.
RECSEL – Sound is output from the CD-R/TAPE OUT, DVR/VCR1 OUT or DVR/VCR2 OUT jack. For details, see Playing a different source when recording on page 73.
3 Select the volume level setting.
1
Variable – Use this setting if you’ve connected a power amplifier in the sub room (this receiver is simply being used as a pre-amp) and you will be using this receiver’s controls to adjust the volume.
Fixed – Use this setting if you’ve connected a fully integrated amplifier (such as another Pioneer VSX receiver) in the sub room and want to use that receiver’s volume controls. (This setting is not available if the surround back system setting is set to ZONE 2.)
With the Fixed setting, the source is sent from this receiver at maximum volume, so make sure the volume is quite low in the sub zone at first and then experiment to find the correct level.
4 When you're finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays
Make the following settings if you have connected a Pioneer plasma display to this receiver using an SR+ cable. Note that the number of function settings available will depend on the plasma display you’ve connected.
See also Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display on page 62 and Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer plasma display on page 63.
1 Select ‘SR+ Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.
DVD/LD
8. Other Setup
a. Multi Ch In Setup b. ZONE Audio Setup
c. SR+ Setup
d. HDMI Control Setup e. OSD Adjustment
DVD/LD
-
55.0
dB
8c. SR+ Setup
PDP Volume Control OFF
Monitor Out Connect [ OFF ]
-
55.0
dB
:Return
Note
1 If you selected ZONE 2 in the Surround back speaker setting on page 39, you won’t be able to change the volume level.
:Finish
69
En
Page 70
10
Other Settings
2 Select the ‘
PDP Volume Control
’ setting you want.
OFF – The receiver does not control the volume of the plasma display.
ON – When the receiver is switched to one of the inputs that use the plasma display (DVD/LD, for example), the volume on the plasma display is muted so only sound from the receiver is heard.
3 Assign any input source connected to the plasma display to the corresponding input number.
This matches the receiver’s input source with a numbered video input on the plasma display. For example, assign DVD/LD to input-2 if you have connected the your DVD video output to video input 2 on the plasma display.
•The Monitor Out Connect should be set to the input that you’ve used to connect this receiver to your plasma display.
DVD/LD
8c. SR+ Setup
PDP Volume Control [ OFF ]
Monitor Out Connect OFF
4 When you're finished, press
-
55.0
dB
:Finish
RETURN
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
OSD Adjustment
Use this feature to adjust your TV display if it seems difficult to see all the instructions on the screen.
1 Select ‘OSD Adjustment’ from the Other Setup menu.
DVD/LD
8. Other Setup
a. Multi Ch In Setup b. ZONE Audio Setup c. SR+ Setup d. HDMI Control Setup
e. OSD Adjustment
AA
-
55.0
dB
X=0 , Y=0
[ Finish ]
:Return
A
:Cancel
A
70
En
2Use /// to move the display field around until you get one that you feel best suits your TV.
3 When you're finished, press
ENTER
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
Page 71
Using other functions
Chapter 11:
Using other functions
Setting What it does Option(s)
Setting the Audio options
There are a number of additional sound settings you can make using the Audio Parameter menu. The defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold.
Important
• Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the Audio Parameter menu, it is unavailable due to the current source, settings and status of the receiver.
1Press
2Use
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver, certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the table below for notes on this.
3Use
See the table below for the options available for each setting.
4Press
Setting What it does Option(s)
MCACC
(MCACC preset)
EQ
(Acoustic Calibration EQ)
S-WAVE
(Standing Wave)
DELAY
(Sound Delay)
MIDNIGHT Allows you to hear effective
LOUDNESS Used to get good bass and treble
A PARAMETER (AUDIO PARAMETER
/
to select the setting you want to adjust.
/
to set it as necessary.
RETURN
to confirm and exit the menu.
Selects your favorite MCACC preset memory when multiple preset memories are saved. When a MCACC preset memory has been renamed, the name given is displayed.
Switches on/off the effects of EQ Pro. only for the MCACC preset memory selected. This setting is available for each MCACC preset memory.
Switches on/off the effects of Standing Wave Control only for the MCACC preset memory selected. This setting is available for each MCACC preset memory.
Some monitors have a slight delay when showing video, so the soundtrack will be slightly out of sync with the picture. By adding a bit of delay, you can adjust the sound to match the presentation of the video.
surround sound of movies at low volumes.
from music sources at low volumes.
M1. MEMORY 1
M6. MEMORY 6
M1. MEMORY 1
LOUDNESS ON
).
to
Default:
MCACC OFF
ON
b
OFF
ON
OFF
0.0 to 6.0 (frames)
1 second = 30 frames (NTSC)
Default: 0.0
MID/LDN OFF
MIDNIGHT ON
a
TONE
(Tone Control)
c
BASS
c
TREBLE
S.RTRV
(Sound Retriever)
DNR
(Digital Noise Reduction)
DIALOGUE (Dialog Enhance­ment)
HIBITSMP
(High Bit / High Sampling)
DUAL
(Dual Mono)
DRC
(Dynamic Range Control)
Applies the treble and bass tone controls to a source, or bypasses them completely.
Adjusts the amount of bass. –6 to +6 (dB)
Adjusts the amount of treble. –6 to +6 (dB)
When audio data is removed during the WMA/MP3/MPEG-4 AAC compression process, sound quality often suffers from an uneven sound image. The Sound Retriever feature employs new DSP technology that helps bring CD quality sound back to compressed 2-channel audio by restoring sound pressure and smoothing jagged artifacts left over after compression.
May improve the quality of sound in a noisy source (for example, cassette or video tape with lots of background noise) when switched on.
Localizes dialog in the center channel to make it stand out from other background sounds in a TV or movie soundtrack.
Creates a wider dynamic range with digital sources like CDs or DVDs.
Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital soundtracks should be played. Dual mono is not widely used, but is sometimes necessary when two languages need to be sent to separate channels.
Adjusts the level of dynamic range for movie soundtracks optimized for Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio (you may need to use this feature when listening to surround sound at low volumes).
BYPASS
ON
Default: 0 (dB)
Default: 0 (dB)
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
CH1 – Channel 1 is heard only
CH2 – Channel 2 is heard only
CH1 CH2
Both channels heard from front speakers
d
AUTO
OFF
MAX
MID
11
71
En
Page 72
11
Using other functions
Setting What it does Option(s)
LFE ATT
(LFE Attenuate)
SACD GAIN
HDMI
(HDMI Audio)
A. DELAY
(Auto delay)
C. WIDTH
(Center Width) (Applicable only when using a center speaker)
DIMENSION
PANORAMA
C. IMAGE
(Center Image) (Applicable only when using a center speaker)
EFFECT Sets the effect level for the currently
Some Dolby Digital and DTS audio sources include ultra-low bass tones. Set the LFE attenuator as necessary to prevent the ultra-low bass tones from distorting the sound from the speakers. The LFE is not limited when set to 0 dB, which is the recommended value. When set to –5 dB, –10 dB, –15 dB or –20 dB, the LFE is limited by the respective degree. When OFF is selected, no sound is output from the LFE channel.
Brings out detail in SACDs by
e
maximizing the dynamic range (during digital processing).
Specifies the routing of the HDMI audio signal out of this receiver (amp) or through to a TV or plasma display. When THROUGH is selected, no sound is output from this receiver.
This feature automatically corrects the audio-to-video delay between components connected with an HDMI cable. The audio delay time is set depending on the operational status of the display connected with an HDMI cable. The video delay time is automatically adjusted according
to the audio delay time.
g
Provides a better blend of the front speakers by spreading the center channel between the front right and left speakers, making it sound wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower settings).
g
Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from front to back, making the sound more distant (minus settings), or more forward (positive settings).
g
Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a ‘wraparound’ effect.
h
Adjusts the center image to create a wider stereo effect with vocals. Adjust the effect from 0 (all center channel sent to front right and left speakers) to 10 (center channel sent to the center speaker only).
selected Advanced Surround mode (each mode can be set separately).
f
0dB
–5dB/ –10dB/
–15dB/ –20dB/
OFF
0 to 6 (dB)
Default: 0 (dB)
AMP
THROUGH
OFF
ON
0 to 7
Default: 3
–3 to +3
Default: 0
OFF
ON
0 to 10
Default: 3
10 to 90
a.When MCACC OFF is selected, all MCACC preset memories become deactivated. b.When EQ OFF is selected, the MCACC indicator does not light even when a MCACC preset memory is selected. c.The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON. d.The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals. Select MAX or MID for signals other than Dolby TrueHD. e.You shouldn’t have any problems using this with most SACD discs, but if the sound distorts, it is best to switch the gain setting back to 0 dB. f. This feature is only available when the connected display supports the automatic audio/video synchronizing capability (‘lip-sync’) for HDMI. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set A. DELAY to OFF and adjust the delay time manually. For more details about the lip-sync feature of your display, contact the manufacturer directly. g.Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music/ Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode. h.Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Music mode.
Setting the Video options
There are a number of additional picture settings you can make using the Video Parameter menu. The defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold.
Important
• Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the Video Parameter menu, it is unavailable due to the current source, setting and status of the receiver.
1 Press
2Use
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver, certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the table below for notes on this.
3Use
See the table below for the options available for each setting.
4 Press
Setting What it does Option(s)
V. CONV
(Digital Video Conversion)
BRIGHT
(Brightness)
CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast between light
HUE Adjusts the red/green balance. –10 to +10
CHROMA Adjusts saturation from dull to
V PARAMETER (VIDEO PARAMETER
/
to select the setting you want to adjust.
/
to set it as necessary.
1
RETURN
to confirm and exit the menu.
Converts video signals for output from the MONITOR OUT jacks for all video types.
Adjusts the overall brightness. –10 to +10
and dark.
bright.
).
ON
OFF
Default: 0
–10 to +10
Default: 0
Default: 0
–10 to +10
Default: 0
72
En
Note
1 Brightness, Contrast, Hue, Chroma, Resolution and Aspect can be set for each input source.
Page 73
Using other functions
11
Setting What it does Option(s)
a
RES
(Resolution)
ASP
(Aspect)
a.When a resolut ion value is selected in this setting and the analog signals input are converted and output as HDMI signals, images may not appear depending on the video signals being input or the resolution of your monitor. Also, depending on the source component or the monitor being used, the output resolution may be different from this setting. Conversion to 1080p is available only for the input signals of 480i/576i/480p/576p.
Specifies the output resolution of the video signal (when analog video input signals are output at the HDMI OUT connector, select this according to the resolution of your monitor and the images you wish to watch). When AUTO is selected, the resolution is automatically selected depending on the capability of the display connected to this receiver.
Specifies the aspect ratio when analog video input signals are output at the HDMI output. Make your desired settings while checking each setting on your display (if the image doesn’t match your monitor type, cropping or black bands appear).
AUTO
PURE
480p/576p
720p
1080i
1080p
THROUGH
(none)
NORMAL
ZOOM
Making an audio or a video recording
You can make an audio or a video recording from the built-in tuner, or from an audio or video source
connected to the receiver (such as a CD player or TV). To use this feature, you must set ZONE2/RECSEL to
RECSEL in the ZONE Audio Setup. For details, see ZONE Audio Setup on page 69.
Keep in mind you can’t make a digital recording from an analog source or vice-versa, so make sure the components you are recording to/from are hooked up in the same way (see Connecting your equipment on page 12 for more on connections).
Since the video converter is not available when making recordings (from the video OUT jacks) make sure to use the same type of video cable for connecting your recorder as you used to connect your video source (the one you want to record) to this receiver. For example, you must connect your recorder using S-video if your source has also been connected using S-video.
1
For more information about video connections, see
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other video sources on page 16.
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
XM RADIO
GALLERY
BD TV CTRL
SIRIUS
TUNER
HDMI
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
DVD TV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
HOME MEDIA
1 Select the source you want to record.
Use the input source buttons (or INPUT SELECT).
• If necessary, press SIGNAL SELECT to select the input signal corresponding to the source component (see Choosing the input signal on page 31 for more on this).
2 Prepare the source you want to record.
Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video, DVD etc.
3 Prepare the recorder.
Insert a blank tape, MD, video etc. into the recording device and set the recording levels.
Refer to the instructions that came with the recorder if you are unsure how to do this. Most video recorders set the audio recording level automatically—check the component's instruction manual if you’re unsure.
4 Start recording, then start playback of the source component.
Tip
• If you have a digital recorder connected to the DIGITAL OUT1 (ZONE3) digital output and ZONE 3 is switched on (see Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on page 60), you can also select a different input source for this output while ZONE 3 shows in the display.
Playing a different source when recording
Using this receiver, it’s possible to listen to a different analog source than the one you’re recording.
AUDIO VIDEO
PHONES
PARAMETER
(TUNE)
(ST) (ST)
ENTER
(TUNE)
SETUP
RETURN
TUNER EDITSPEAKERS BAND
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
MULTI – ZONE & SOURCE/REC SEL
CONTROL ON/OFF
SIGNAL
SB ch
SELECT
PROCESSING
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO L RAUDIO
STEREO/ F.S.SURR
Note
1 • The receiver’s volume, Audio parameters (the tone controls, for example), and surround effects have no effect on the recorded signal.
• Some digital sources are copy-protected, and can only be recorded in analog.
• Some video sources are copy-protected. These cannot be recorded.
73
En
Page 74
11
Using other functions
1 During recording, press the
REC SELECT CONTROL
button on the front panel until RECOUT shows in the
1
display.
2 While RECOUT shows in the display, use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source you want to record.
The default, RECOUT SOURCE, records the source you’re currently listening to (as in Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu. above).
• Note that the setting you make here is stored in memory, even if you switch off the receiver, so if you want to record a different input source later, you must do so with REC SELECT, or by selecting
RECOUT SOURCE.
3 After RECOUT disappears from the display, select the input source you want to listen to.
This will be heard from the main system without affecting your recording.
2
Reducing the level of an analog signal
The input attenuator lowers the input level of an analog signal when it’s too strong. You can use this if you find the that the OVER indicator is lights often, or you can
hear distortion in the sound.
• Press ANALOG ATT to switch the input attenuator on or off.
D.ACCESS
3
SLEEP
+
SR
DIMMER
GENRE
ANALOG ATT
CLASS
• You can check the remaining sleep time at any time by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing repeatedly will
cycle through the sleep options again.
4
Dimming the display
You can choose between four brightness levels for the front panel display. Note that when selecting sources, the display automatically brightens for a few seconds.
D.ACCESS
SLEEP
+
SR
DIMMER
GENRE
ANALOG ATT
CLASS
• Press DIMMER repeatedly to change the brightness of the front panel display.
Switching the speaker impedance
We recommend using speakers of 8 with this system, but it is possible to switch the impedance setting if you plan to use speakers with a 6 impedance rating.
1 With the receiver in standby, press
while holding down the
ON
2 Select using
/
SPEAKER
using
.
SETUP
/
SPEAKER 6 – Use this setting if your speakers are rated at 6 Ω.
SPEAKER 8 – Use this setting if your speakers are rated at 8 or more.
STANDBY/
button.
, then select
8
or
6
74
En
Using the sleep timer
The sleep timer switches the receiver into standby after a specified amount of time so you can fall asleep without worrying about the receiver being left on all night. Use the remote control to set the sleep timer.
SLEEP
+
SR
• Press
SLEEP
repeatedly to set the sleep time.
30 min 60 min
Off
Note
1If RECOUT does not appear in the display, you may have to switch ZONE 2 off by pressing MULTI ZONE & SOURCE ON/OFF and selecting either ZONE 3 or off (the MULTI-ZONE indicator disappears). See Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on page 60 for more on this.
2If RECOUT SOURCE is selected, changing the input source likewise changes the input source used for your recording. 3 The attenuator isn’t available with digital sources, or when using the Stream Direct modes. 4 You can also switch off the sleep timer simply by switching off the receiver.
DIMMER
GENRE
ANALOG ATT
90 min
Page 75
Using other functions
11
Checking your system settings
Use the status display screen to check your current settings for features such as surround back channel processing and your current MCACC preset.
AUDIO SUBTITLE
HDD
DVD
DISP
CH
T.DISP
SIGNAL SEL
STANDARD
THX
PHASE
ZONE 3
CH
STEREO/
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
MCACC S.DIRECT
STATUS
1
again to
PHOTO
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
1Press
STATUS
to check the system settings.
These appear on the front panel display. The front panel display shows each of the following
settings for two seconds each:
Input source
Surround Back Processing
MCACC preset
ZONE 2 / REC SEL
HDMI Control
2 When you’re finished, press switch off the display.
Resetting the system
Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s settings to the factory default. Use the front panel controls to do this.
1 Switch the receiver into standby.
2 While holding down the panel, press
STANDBY/ON
The display shows RESET NO.
3 Press the
ENTER
button on the front panel.
4 Select RESET using button on the front panel. The display shows RESET? OK.
5Press
ENTER
to confirm.
OK appears in the display to indicate that the receiver
has been reset to the factory default settings.
• Note that all settings will be saved, even if the receiver is unplugged.
Default system settings
Setting Default
HDMI Audio Amp
Digital Video Conversion On
Speakers A
Surround Back System Normal (default)
Speaker System Front SMALL
Crossover 80 Hz
X-Curve OFF
THX Audio Setting 0–1ft.
Inputs
See Input function default and possible settings on page 68.
MULTI-ZONE
Zone 2 Volume Type Variable
Zone 2 Volume -60
SR+
SR+ Control On/Off OFF
SR+ Volume Control On/Off OFF
SETUP
button on the front
.
/
, then press the
Center SMALL
Surr. SMALL
SB SMALLx2
SW YES
ENTER
Note
1 If the Pure Direct mode is switched on, some settings above will show OFF, even though they are on.
75
En
Page 76
11
Using other functions
Setting Default
Monitor Out OFF
DSP
MCACC Position Memory M1: MEMORY 1
Surround back channel Processing
Phase Control ON
Full Band Phase Control OFF
Sound Retriever OFF
Sound Delay 0 frame
Dual Mono CH1
DRC AUTO
SACD Gain 0 dB
LFE Attenuate 0 dB
Auto delay OFF
Digital Safety OFF
Effect Level ExtendedStereo 90
Other modes 50
2 PL II Music Options Center Width 3
Dimension 0
Panorama OFF
Neo:6 Options Center Image 3
All Inputs Listening Mode (2 ch) AUTO SURROUND
Listening Mode (x ch) AUTO SURROUND
Listening Mode (HP) STEREO
See also Setting the Audio options on page 71 for other default DSP settings.
MCACC
Channel level (M1–M6) 0 dB
Speaker Distance (M1–M6) 10 ft
Standing Wave (M1–M6)
EQ Data (M1–M6) All channels/bands 0 dB
EQ Wide Trim (M1–M6) 0.0 dB
Standing Wave On/ Off
ATT 0 dB
SWch Wide Trim 0.0
ON
ON
76
En
Page 77
Controlling the rest of your system
Chapter 12:
Controlling the rest of your system
4Use
/
to select the first letter of the brand name
ENTER
Setting the remote to control other components
Most components can be assigned to one of the input source buttons (such as DVD/LD or CD) using the component’s manufacturer preset code stored in the remote.
However, there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote control will not work for the model that you are using.
If you can’t find a preset code that matches the component you want to control, you can still teach the remote individual commands from another remote control (see Programming signals from other remote controls below).
Note
• You can cancel or exit any of the steps by pressing RECEIVER. To go back a step, press RETURN.
• After one minute of inactivity, the remote automatically exits the operation.
of your component then press
This should be the manufacturer’s name (for example, P for Pioneer).
5Use
/
the list then press
6Use
to select the manufacturer’s name from
ENTER
.
/
to select the proper code from the list,
then try using this remote with your component.
The code should start with the component type (for example, DVD 020). If there is more than one, start with
the first one.
2
To try out the remote control, switch the component on or off (into standby) by pressing SOURCE . If it doesn’t seem to work, select the next code from the list (if there is one).
• If you can’t find or properly enter a preset code, you can still teach the remote individual commands from another remote control (see Programming signals from other remote controls below).
7 If your component is controlled successfully, press ENTER
to confirm.
The remote LCD display shows OK.
.
12
Selecting preset codes directly
Programming signals from other remote controls
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
XM RADIO
HDMI
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
BD TV CTRL
SIRIUS
TUNER
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
DVD TV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
SETUPSETUP
PROGRAM
CATEGORY
TV VOL
GUIDE
1 While pressing the RECEIVER button, press
CLEAR +
10
TUNE
ST ST
ENTER
TUNE
TV CONTROL
INPUT
TV CH
SELECT
CH LEVEL
CLASS
ENTER
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
RETURNRETURN
VOL
DISC
SETUP
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2Use
/
to select PRESET then press
ENTER
.
3 Press the input source button for the component you want to control then press
ENTER
.
The LCD on the remote displays the component you want to control (for example DVD or TV).
Note
1 You can’t assign the RECEIVER, TUNER, iPod, HOME MEDIA GALLERY (VSX-94TXH only), XM RADIO or SIRIUS buttons. 2 • When using a Pioneer HDD recorder, please select PIONEER DVR 487, 488, 489 or 493.
• When using a Pioneer plasma display released prior to summer 2005, please select preset codes 637 or 660. 3 The remote can store about 200 preset codes (this has been tested with codes of Pioneer format only). 4 • You can’t assign the RECEIVER, TUNER, iPod, HOME MEDIA GALLERY (VSX-94TXH only), XM RADIO or SIRIUS buttons.
TV CONTROL buttons (TV, TV VOL +/–, TV CH +/– and INPUT SELECT) can only be learned after selecting TV CTRL.
1
If the preset code for your component is not available, or the available preset codes do not operate correctly, you can program signals from the remote control of another component. This can also be used to program additional operations (buttons not covered in the presets) after
assigning a preset code.
3
1 While pressing the RECEIVER button, press The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
.
2Use
/
to select LEARNING then press
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the component you want to control (for example DVD or TV).
3 Press the input source button for the component you want to control then press
ENTER
PRES KEY shows in the LCD display.
SETUP
.
ENTER
.
.
4
77
En
Page 78
12
Controlling the rest of your system
4 Point the two remote controls towards each other then press the button that will be doing the learning on this receiver’s remote control. PRES KEY starts flashing to indicate the remote is ready
to accept a signal.
• The remote controls should be 3 cm to 5 cm (1 to 2 inches) apart.
3 cm to 5 cm
(1 to 2 inches)
ANALOG
ATT
DISC
RETURN
HDMI
ZONE2/3
VOL
RECEIVER
SYSTEM OFF
BD TV CTRL
SIRIUS
TUNER
XM RADIO
CD-R
i Pod
GALLERY
INPUT
SELECT
HOME MEDIA
CD
DVD TV
DVR2
DVR1
RECEIVER SOURCE
CH
DVD
MUTE
CLASS
ENTER
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
MEMORY
ADV. SURR MENU T.EDIT V PARAMETER
CH
LEVEL
INFO
GENRE
DIMMER
SLEEP
SBch
CH
HDD
TV CH
MCACC S.DIRECT
REC STOP
STANDARD
T.DISP
ENTER
REC
TUNE
TUNE
DISP
TV CONTROL
THX
RECEIVER
PHASE
INPUT
SELECT
+
10
SIGNAL SEL
CLEAR
+
ST ST
SR
GUIDE
PHOTO
PROGRAM
ANT
MPX
TV VOL
SHIFT
D.ACCESS
AUDIOSUBTITLE
STATUS
MULTI OPE TOP MENU
SETUP
A PARAMETER
BAND
CATEGORY
5 Press the corresponding button on the other remote control that is sending (teaching) the signal to this receiver’s remote control.
For example, if you want to learn the playback control signal, press and hold briefly. The LCD display will
show OK if the operation has been learned.
1
If for some reasons the operation hasn’t been learned the LCD will display ERROR briefly and then display PRES KEY again. If this happens, keep pressing the (teaching) button as you vary the distance between the two remotes,
until the LCD display shows OK.
2
Certain buttons represent operations that cannot be learned from other remote controls.
3
The buttons available are shown below (with the exception of the TV controls, a combination of SHIFT and these buttons can also be learned):
7 Press and hold the RECEIVER button for a couple of seconds to exit and store the operation(s).
Erasing one of the remote control button settings
This erases one of the buttons you have programmed and restores the button to the factory default.
1 While pressing the RECEIVER button, press The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2Use
/
to select
ERASE
then press
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the component corresponding to the button setting to be erased.
3 Press the input source button corresponding to the command to be erased then press
ENTER
The LCD display flashes PRES KEY.
4 Press and hold the button to be erased for two seconds.
The LCD display shows OK or NO CODE to confirm the button has been erased.
5 Repeat step 4 to erase other buttons.
6 Press and hold the RECEIVER button for a couple of seconds when you’re done.
ENTER
.
SETUP
.
.
78
En
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
Resetting the remote control presets
This will erase all preset remote control preset codes and programmed buttons.
1 While pressing the RECEIVER button, press
SETUP
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
CD
CD-R
XM RADIO
i Pod
TUNE
ENTER
TUNE
TV CONTROL
BD TV CTRL
SIRIUS
TUNER
DIMMER
GENRE
CH LEVEL
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
ENTER
CLASS
HDMI
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
RETURN
ANALOG ATT
DISC
2Use
/
to select
RESET
then press
ENTER
.
RESET flashes in the LCD display.
3 Press and hold
TV CONTROL
INPUT
TV CH
TV VOL
ANT
MPX
AUDIO SUBTITLE
PHOTO
STATUS
SIGNAL SEL
SELECT
VOL
INFO
REC
MUTE
REC STOP
MEMORY
HDD
DVD
DISP
CH
CH
T.DISP
STEREO/
SBch
F.S.SURR
The LCD shows OK to confirm the remote presets have been erased.
Confirming preset codes
Use this feature to check which preset code is assigned to an input source button.
1 While pressing the RECEIVER button, press
ENTER for about two seconds
SETUP
.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2Use
/
to select READ ID then press
ENTER
.
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the input source button you want to check.
DVD TV
HOME MEDIA
DVR2
GALLERY
DVR1
SLEEP
+
SR
D.ACCESS
CLEAR +
10
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU
ST ST
BAND
SETUP
PROGRAM
GUIDE
CATEGORY
6 To program additional signals for the current component repeat steps 4 and 5.
To program signals for another component, exit and repeat steps 1 through 5.
Note
1 Note that interference from TVs or other devices will sometimes result in the remote control learning the wrong signal. 2 • Some commands from other remote controls cannot be learned, but in most cases the remotes just need to be moved closer together or farther apart.
• If the remote LCD shows FULL, it means the memory is full. See Erasing one of the remote control button settings below to erase a programmed button you’re not using to free up more memory (note that some signals may take more memory than others). 3 Note that the number key decimal button (+10/D.ACCESS) may not be learned with some components.
.
.
Page 79
Controlling the rest of your system
12
3 Press the button of the component for which you
ENTER
want to check the preset code, then press
.
The brand name and preset code appears in the display for three seconds.
Renaming input source names
You can customize the names that appear on the remote LCD when you select an input source (for example, you could change the name of DVR 1 to HDD/DVR).
1 While pressing the RECEIVER button, press
SETUP
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2Use
/
to select
RENAME
then press
ENTER
.
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the button of the input source you want to rename.
3 Press the input source button you want to rename then press
4Use
ENTER
.
/
to select NAME EDT then press
ENTER
.
To reset the button to its original (default) name, select
NAME RST above.
5 Edit the name of the input source in the remote control LCD, pressing
ENTER
when you’re finished.
Use / to change the character and / to move forward/back a position. The name can be up to eight characters (the possible characters are listed below).
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789 \ / * + – [space]
Direct function
• Default setting: ON
You can use the direct function feature to control one component using the remote control while at the same time, using your receiver to playback a different component. This could let you, for example, use the remote control to set up and listen to a CD on the receiver and then use the remote control to rewind a tape in your VCR while you continue to listen to your CD player.
When direct function is on, any component you select (using the input source buttons) will be selected by both the receiver and the remote control. When you turn direct function off, you can operate the remote control without
affecting the receiver.
1 While pressing the RECEIVER button, press
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
1
SETUP
2Use
/
to select
DIRECT F
then press
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the button of the input source you want to control.
3 Press the input source button for the component you want to control then press
4Use
/
to switch direct function ON or OFF then
ENTER
press
.
ENTER
.
The LCD shows OK to confirm the setting.
.
Multi Operation and System Off
The Multi Operation feature allows you to program a series of up to 5 commands for the components in your system. For example, you could turn on your TV, turn on your DVD player and start playing the loaded DVD using only two buttons on the remote control.
Similar to multi operations, System Off allows you to use one button to stop and switch off a series of components
in your system at the same time.
2
Programming a multi-operation or a shutdown sequence
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
CD
DVD TV
HOME MEDIA
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
CD-R
GALLERY
XM RADIO
BD TV CTRL
SIRIUS
TUNER
HDMI
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER TOP MENU
BAND
SETUPSETUP
PROGRAM
CATEGORY
TV VOL
GUIDE
1 While pressing the RECEIVER button, press The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2Use
/
to select MULTI OP or SYS OFF from the
ENTER
menu and press
If you selected Multi Operation (
.
MULTI OP
the remote prompts you for an input source button. If you selected System Off (
SYSOFF
), go to step 4.
3 Press the input source button for the component that will start the multi-operation then press
For example, if you want to start the sequence by switching on your DVD player, press DVD.
4Use
/
.
To erase any previously stored multi-operations (or
to select CODE EDT then press
shutdown sequences) select CODE ERS above.
CLEAR +
10
CH LEVEL
TUNE
ST ST
ENTER
TUNE
TV CONTROL
INPUT
TV CH
SELECT
CLASS
ENTER
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
VOL
), the LCD on
ENTER
DISC
RETURNRETURN
ENTER
ENTER
.
SETUP
.
.
.
Note
1 You can’t use direct function with the TV CTRL function. 2 • Before Multi Operation and System Off will work correctly, you must setup the remote to work with your TV and other components (see Setting the remote to control other components on page 77 for more on this).
• Some units may take some time to power up, in which case multiple operations may not be possible.
• Power on and off commands only work with components that have a standby mode.
79
En
Page 80
12
T.DISP
PHOTO
Controlling the rest of your system
5Use
/
to select a command in the sequence then
ENTER
press If this is the first command in the sequence, select 1ST CODE. Otherwise, simply choose the next command in the sequence. PRES KEY flashes after you press ENTER.
6 If necessary, press the input source button for the component whose command you want to input.
This is only necessary if the command is for a new component (input source).
7 Select the button for the command you want to input.
The following remote control commands can be selected:
• You don’t need to program the receiver to switch on
or off. This is done automatically.
With Pioneer components, you don’t need to:
• program the power to switch off in a shutdown
sequence (except DVD recorders);
• program the power to switch on if it’s the source
component selected in step 3;
• program a Pioneer TV or monitor to switch on if the
input function (selected in step 2) has video input terminals;
These take priority in multi operations (not shutdown).
8 Repeat steps 5–7 to program a sequence of up to five commands.
9 When you’re finished, use from the menu and press You will return to the remote control SETUP menu. Select * EXIT * again to exit.
.
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
XM RADIO
i Pod
TUNE
ENTER
TUNE
TV CONTROL
BD TV CTRL
SIRIUS
TUNER
DIMMER
GENRE
CH LEVEL
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
ENTER
CLASS
HDMI
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
RETURN
DVD TV
DVR2
DVR1
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER TOP MENU
BAND
SETUP
CATEGORY
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
SLEEP
+
SR
CLEAR +
10
ST ST
PROGRAM
GUIDE
ANALOG ATT
DISC
ENTER
TV CONTROL
INPUT
TV CH
TV VOL
ANT
MPX
AUDIO SUBTITLE
PHOTO
STATUS
/
SIGNAL SEL
VOL
SELECT
INFO
REC
MUTE
REC STOP
MEMORY
HDD
DVD
DISP
CH
CH
T.DISP
STEREO/
SBch
F.S.SURR
to select EDITEXIT
.
Using multi operations
You can start multi operations with the receiver switched on, or in standby.
PHOTO
T.DISP
SIGNAL SEL
THX
PHASE
RECEIVER
STEREO/
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
1 Press MULTI OPE. MULTI OP flashes in the display.
2
Press
an input source button that has been set up
with a multi operation.
The receiver switches on (if it was in standby) and the programmed multi operation is performed automatically.
Using System off
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVER SOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
XM RADIO
DVD TV
BD TV CTRL
HDMI
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
1 Press MULTI OPE. MULTI OP flashes in the display.
2 Press
SOURCE
.
The command sequence you programmed will run, then all Pioneer components will switch off
receiver.
STEREO/
SBch
SIGNAL SEL
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
THX
MCACC S.DIRECT
PHASE
RECEIVER
1
, followed by this
80
En
Note
1 In order to avoid accidently switching off a DVD recorder that is currently recording, no DVD recorder power off codes are sent.
Page 81
Controlling the rest of your system
12
Controls for TVs
This remote control can control components after entering the proper codes or teaching the receiver the commands (see Setting the remote to control other components on page 77 for more on this). Use the input source buttons to select the component.
•The TV CONTROL buttons on the remote control are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV CTRL button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the
TV CTRL button.
Button(s) Function Components
TV Press to switch the component
INPUT SELECT
TV CH +/– Selects channels. Cable TV/Satellite
TV VOL +/– Adjust the TV volume. Cable TV/Satellite
SOURCESwitches the DTV on or off. DTV
Switches the DTV on or off. DTV Press to get information on DTV
Use to choose the BLUE
Use to choose the YELLOW
Use to choose the RED
Use to choose the GREEN
AUDIO
SUBTITLE (SHIFT+ DISP)
GUIDE Use as the GUIDE button for
DISP Use to display the channel
RETURN Use to select RETURN or EXIT.DTV
Number buttons
+10 button Use to add a decimal point when
ENTER/ DISC
MENU Select different menus from the
/// & ENTER
assigned to the TV CTRL button on or off.
Switches the TV input. (Not possible with all models.)
Switches the TV or CATV between standby and on.
programs.
commands on a DTV menu.
commands on a DTV menu.
commands on a DTV menu.
commands on a DTV menu. Use to switch DTV audio tracks. DTV Use to return to the previously
selected channel.
navigating.
information.
Use to select a specific TV channel.
selecting a specific TV channel. Use to enter a channel. Cable TV/Satellite
DTV functions. Select the menu screen. Cable TV/Satellite
Press to select or adjust and navigate items on the menu screen.
Cable TV/Satellite TV/TV/DTV
Cable TV/Satellite TV/TV/DTV
TV/TV/DTV
TV/TV/DTV
Cable TV/Satellite TV/TV
DTV
DTV
DTV
DTV
DTV
Cable TV/Satellite TV/TV/DTV
Cable TV/Satellite TV/TV/DTV
Cable TV/TV/DTV
Cable TV/Satellite TV/TV/DTV
DTV
TV/TV/DTV DTV
TV/TV Cable TV/Satellite
TV/TV/DTV
Controls for other components
This remote control can control these components after entering the proper codes or teaching the receiver the commands (see Setting the remote to control other components on page 77 for more on this). Use the input source buttons to select the component.
Button (s) Function Components
SOURCEPress to switch the component
Pause playback or recording. CD/MD/CD-R/
Start playback. CD/MD/CD-R/
Hold down for fast forward
Hold down for fast reverse
Stops playback. CD/MD/CD-R/
REC
(SHIFT+)
REC STOP (SHIFT+)
JUKEBOX
(
SHIFT+)
Number buttons
+10 button Selects tracks higher than 10. (For
between standby and on.
Press to return to the start of the current track or chapter. Repeated presses skips to the start of previous tracks or chapters.
Press to advance to the start of the next track or chapter. Repeated presses skips to the start of following tracks or chapters.
playback.
playback.
Starts recording. MD/CD-R/DVR
Stops recording. DVR player
Switches to the Jukebox feature. DVR player
Directly access tracks on a program source.
Use the number buttons to navigate the on-screen display.
example, press +10 then 3 to select track 13.)
CD/MD/CD-R/ DVD/LD/BD/DVR player/VCR/ Cassette deck
CD/MD/CD-R/ DVD/LD/BD player
CD/MD/CD-R/ DVD/LD/BD player
DVD/LD/BD/DVR player/VCR/ Cassette deck
DVD/LD/BD/DVR player/VCR/ Cassette deck
CD/MD/CD-R/ DVD/LD/BD/DVR player/VCR/ Cassette deck
CD/MD/CD-R/ DVD/LD/BD/DVR player/VCR/ Cassette deck
DVD/LD/BD/DVR player/VCR/ Cassette deck
player/VCR/ Cassette deck
CD/MD/CD-R/ LD/BD player/ VCR
DVD/DVR player
CD/MD/CD-R/LD player/VCR
81
En
Page 82
12
V
O
L O
D B
Controlling the rest of your system
Button (s) Function Components
ENTER/ DISC
TOP MENU Displays the disc ‘top’ menu of a
MENU Displays menus concerning the
Pauses the tape. Cassette deck Stops the tape. Cassette deck
ENTER Starts playback. Cassette deck
/ Fast rewinds/fast forwards the
///
& ENTER GUIDE Press to access the DVD player
CH +/– Selects channels. VCR/DVD/DVR
AUDIO Changes the audio language or
SUBTITLE (SHIFT+ DISP)
SHIFT+ AUDIO
DISP Press to display information. DVD/BD/DVR
HDD (SHIFT+ CH–)
DVD (SHIFT+ CH+)
Chooses the disc. Multiple CD
Use as the ENTER button. VCR/DVD/BD
Displays the setup screen for DVR players.
player
player DVR player
Changes sides of the LD. LD player
DVD/BD/DVR
DVD player.
current DVD or DVR you are using.
tape. Navigates DVD menu/options. DVD/BD/DVR
setup screen or Home Menu.
player DVD/BD/DVR
player
Cassette deck
player DVD/BD/DVR
player
player
channel. Displays/changes the subtitles on
multilingual DVDs.
Switches to the VCR controls when using a VCR/DVD/HDD recorder.
DVD/BD/DVR player
DVD/BD/DVR player
VCR/DVD/DVR player
player
Switches to the hard disk controls
DVR player
when using a DVD/HDD recorder.
Switches to the DVD controls
DVR player
when using a DVD/HDD recorder.
Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s sensor
Many Pioneer components have SR CONTROL jacks which can be used to link components together so that you can use just the remote sensor of one component. When you use a remote control, the control signal is
passed along the chain to the appropriate component.
Important
• Note that if you use this feature, make sure that you
also have at least one set of analog audio, video or HDMI jacks connected to another component for
grounding purposes.
1 Decide which component you want to use the remote sensor of.
When you want to control any component in the chain, this is the remote sensor at which you’ll point the corresponding remote control.
2 Connect the to the
CONTROL IN
CONTROL OUT
jack of that component
jack of another Pioneer component.
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the connection.
MULTI-ZONE
OPTICAL
& SOURCE /REC SEL
OUT1 ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
1
IN (TV/
)
SAT
2
IN (BD)
3
IN (
DVR/
)
VCR 1
4
IN (
)
CD-R
1
ASSIGN­ABLE
1
1
IN (
DVD/
)
LD
(CD)
2
IN
COAXIAL
IN
XM
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
MU & S
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
HDMI
1
IN
(
1
CONTROL
IN
(
2
IN
IN
OUT
2
IN
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
)
LD
3
IN
B
P
4
PR
2
4
IN
2
IN
Y
(BD)
B
P
OUT
PR
(
VIDE
41
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT
CONTROL
IN OUT
CONTROL
IN OUT
F F O
CE
M E
UR
T S
O
Y
S
S
T N O C V T
2
1 CT UT
EO
O E
E L
D
NP
I
I
E
ID
V
S
V
R E
V
V
T
I
T
R
A
-
S
D
CE
C
E R
D
D
C
2
V
1
R
D
R
V
V
D
D
1
G 3 /
O
R
L 2
E
T
A
M
V
T
N
I
O
A
A
E
O
C
R
E R
C S
I O I
D
L
D
R
E
S A
E
U
R
S
V
O
R
N
N
A
N
E
E
M
T
L
R
U
L
I
E
X
DE
T
E
L
R
I
E
T
C
S
N
D
V
U
M
M
H
E
T
.E
M
C
I
E
T
D
R
D
d
T
o
N
L
S
P
A
O
i
B
V
P E
TE
Y
E
R
L
U
S
O
+
M
R
R
M
L
S
D
H
E
E
TE
O
V
C
O
N
M
N
R
E
R
H
D
0
U
O
V
E
R
T
T
R
1
C
F
E
T
+
U
P
N
N
E
S
T
I
T
S
R
S
N
O
S
.
O
C
E
E
T
U
V
V
E
C
T
C
T
S
R
D
C
I
E
T
T
DT
C
ST
D
A
A
U
D
.
E
C
U
.
M
TV
D
N
D
R
Y
E
S
P
h A E
R
H
H
D
L
c R
N
C
R
C
O
E I
B M
E
A
A
U
S
S
EG
P
R
D
N
P
C
T
E
E
N
P
C
O
A
L
A
M
A
C
T
AV
U
T
T
C
L
S
I
T
V
L
E
E
T
T
E
O
M
S
D
V
D
B
I
S
L
V
R
U
U
A
T
E
S
X
G
N
E
S
H
G I
A
V
T
S
PX
I
O I
M
PH
E
P D
S
O
IS
S
U
U
E
C
I
D
T
A
E
A
OP
T
I
R
T
S
T L
F I
U
H
M
S
82
En
3 Continue the chain in the same way for as many components as you have.
Note
1 • If you want to control all your components using this receiver’s remote control, refer to Setting the remote to control other components on page 77. If you have connected a remote control to the CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-plug cable), you won’t be able to control this unit using the remote sensor.
• See Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display on page 62 if you are connecting a Pioneer plasma display.
Page 83
Additional information
Chapter 13:
Additional information
Troubleshooting
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company to carry out repair work.
Power
Symptom Remedy
The power does not turn on. • Make sure that the power cable is plugged in to an active power outlet.
The receiver suddenly switches off or the Phase Control indicator blinks.
During loud playback the power suddenly switches off.
The unit does not respond when the buttons are pressed.
AMP ERR blinks in the display, then the power automatically switches off. The MCACC blinks and the power does not turn on.
OVERHEAT blinks in the display then the power automatically switches off.
• Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in.
• Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel or another set of wires. If so, re-attach the speaker wires, making sure there are no stray strands.
• The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.
• Turn down the volume.
• Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC setup on page 39.
• Switch on the digital safety feature. While holding down the SETUP button on the front panel, press STANDBY/ON to set this receiver to the standby mode. Use / to select D.SAFETY, and then use / to select D.SAFETY 1 or D.SAFETY 2 (select D.SAFETY OFF to deactivate this feature). If the power switches off even with D.SAFETY 2 switched on, turn down the volume. With D.SAFETY 1 or D.SAFETY 2 on, some features may be unavailable.
• Try switching the receiver off then back on again.
• Try disconnecting the power cable, then connect again.
• The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver on. Contact a Pioneer authorized independent service company for help.
• Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switching back on. Check Ventilation on page 6 for information on improving heat dispersal.
13
No sound
Symptom Remedy
No sound is output when an input source is selected. No sound output from the front speakers.
No sound from the surround or center speakers.
• Check the volume, mute setting (press MUTE) and speaker setting (press SPEAKERS).
• Make sure the correct input source is selected.
• Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected.
• Make sure the correct input signal is selected (press SIGNAL SELECT). Note that when PCM is selected, you won’t be able to hear any other signal format.
• Check that the source component is connected properly (see Connecting your equipment on page 12).
• Check that the speakers are connected properly (see Connecting the speakers on page 19).
• Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance mode isn’t selected; select one of the surround listening modes (see Listening in surround sound on page 28).
• Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 47).
• Check the channel level settings (see Channel Level on page 48).
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 19).
83
En
Page 84
13
Additional information
Symptom Remedy
No sound from surround back speakers.
No sound from subwoofer. • Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and the volume turned up.
No sound from one speaker. • Check the speaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on page 19).
Sound is produced from analog components, but not from digital ones (DVD, LD, CD-ROM etc.).
No sound is output or a noise is output when Dolby Digital/DTS software is played back.
• Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL (see Speaker Setting on page 47).
• Make sure surround back processing is set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 32.
• If the source is Dolby Surround EX or DTS ES with no flag to indicate 6.1 compatibility, then with surround back processing set to SBch Auto, there will be no sound from the surround back speakers. In this case, set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 32).
• If the source does not have 6.1 playback channels, make sure that surround back processing is set to SBch ON and a surround mode is selected (see Listening in surround sound on page 28).
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 19). If only one surround back speaker is connected, make sure it’s connected to the left channel speaker terminal.
• If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off.
• Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 47).
• The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher to match the characteristics of your other speakers (see Speaker Setting on page 47)
• If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change your speaker settings to Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES, or Front: LARGE / Subwoofer: PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 47).
• Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF, or a very quiet setting (see Setting the Audio options on page 71).
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 48).
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 48).
• Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 47).
• The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of the advanced effect listening mode, you may be able to create the missing channel (see Listening in surround sound on page 28).
• Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 31).
• Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the component is connected to (see The Input Setup menu on page 67).
• Check the digital output settings on the source component.
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are not selected. Select any other input source.
• Check that your DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/DTS discs.
• Check the digital output settings of your DVD player. Make sure that the DTS signal output is set to On.
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.
84
En
No sound when using the System Setup or Status menu.
• If the HDMI input source is selected, sound is muted until exiting either menu.
• If sound is muted in the sub zone (ZONE 2), it will be restored after exiting the System Setup menu.
Other audio problems
Symptom Remedy
Broadcast stations cannot be selected automatically, or there is considerable noise in radio broadcasts.
A multichannel DVD source appears to be downmixed to 2 channels during playback.
Noise is output when scanning a DTS CD.
When playing a DTS format LD there is audible noise on the soundtrack.
For FM broadcasts
• Fully extend the FM wire antenna, adjust the position for best reception and secure to a wall, etc.
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 22).
For AM broadcasts
• Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna.
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 22).
• Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment, such as a fluorescent light, motor, etc. Switch off or move the other equipment, or move the AM antenna.
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are selected (see Selecting the multichannel analog inputs on page 56).
• This is not a malfunction of the receiver. The scan function of your player alters the digital information, making it unreadable, resulting in noise being output. Lower the volume when scanning.
• Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 31).
Page 85
Additional information
Symptom Remedy
Can’t record audio. • You can only make a digital recording from a digital source, and an analog recording from an analog
Recorded audio is different from the current source, or inaudible.
Subwoofer output is very low. • To route more signal to the subwoofer, set it to PLUS or set the front speakers to SMALL (see Speaker
Everything seems to be set up correctly, but the playback sound is odd.
The PHASE CONTROL feature doesn’t seem to have an audible effect.
Noise or hum can be heard even when there is no sound being input.
There seems to be a time lag between the speakers and the output of the subwoofer.
Can’t use the SR+ features. • Make sure that HDMI Control is set to OFF (see Setting the HDMI Control mode on page 66).
The maximum volume available (shown in the front panel display) is lower than the +12dB maximum.
No sound is output from the CD­R/TAPE OUT, DVR/VCR1 OUT or DVR/VCR2 OUT jack.
Can’t select ZONE 2. • Make sure that ZONE 2 / RECSEL Setting in the ZONE Audio Setup menu is set to ZONE 2 (see ZONE
source.
• For digital sources, make sure that what you’re recording isn’t copy protected.
• Check that the OUT jacks are properly connected to the recorders input jacks (see Connecting analog audio sources on page 18).
• The RECOUT source is set to an input source other than the source you’re listening to. Select RECOUT
SOURCE to record the current input source (see Playing a different source when recording on page 73).
Setting on page 47).
• The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative speaker terminals on the receiver are matched with the corresponding terminals on the speakers (see Connecting the speakers on page 19).
•If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off, or the lowpass cutoff is set to the highest frequency setting. If there is a PHASE setting on your subwoofer, set it to 0º (or depending on the subwoofer, the setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound).
• Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers (see Speaker Distance on page 48).
• Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the same power source are not causing interference.
• See Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8 to set up your system again using MCACC (this will automatically compensate for a delay in the subwoofer output).
• This is not a malfunction. If the levels in Channel Level on page 48 have been adjusted, the maximum volume will change accordingly.
• Make sure that ZONE 2 / RECSEL Setting in the ZONE Audio Setup menu is set to RECSEL (see ZONE
Audio Setup on page 69).
Audio Setup on page 69).
13
Video
Symptom Remedy
No image is output when an input is selected.
Can’t record video. • Check that the source is not copy-protected.
Noisy, intermittent, or distorted picture.
• Check the video connections of the source component (see page 16).
• For high-definition video (using component video connections), or when digital video conversion is switched off (in Setting the Video options on page 72), you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.
• Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using component video, HDMI or S-video cables (see The Input Setup menu on page 67).
• Check the video output settings of the source component.
• Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct.
• Some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. If adjusting this receiver’s Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 72) and/or the resolution settings on your component or display doesn’t work, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the Video options on page 72) OFF.
• The video converter is not available when making recordings. Check that the same type of video cable is used for connecting both the recorder and the video source (the one you want to record) to this receiver.
• Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and display device using the same type of connection (component, S-video or composite), then start playback again.
85
En
Page 86
13
Additional information
Settings
Symptom Remedy
The Auto MCACC Setup continually shows an error.
After using the Auto MCACC Setup, the speaker size setting is incorrect.
Can’t adjust the Fine Speaker Distance setting (page 41) properly.
The display shows KEY LOCK ON when you try to make settings.
Most recent settings have been erased.
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output
• The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in the room as low as possible (see also Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 9). If the noise level cannot be kept low enough, you will have to set up the surround sound manually (page 47).
• There may have been some low frequency noise in the ro om from an air-co ndit ione r, mo tor, et c. Sw itch off all other appliances in the room and use Auto MCACC Setup again.
• Depending on a number of factors (room size, speaker placement, etc.) this may occur in some cases. Change the speaker setting manually in Speaker Setting on page 47, and use the ALL (Keep SP SYSTEM) option for the Custom Menu in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 36 if this is a recurring problem.
• Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals are matched up properly).
• With the receiver in standby, press STANDBY/ON while holding down the SPEAKERS button to disable the key lock.
• The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting.
Symptom Remedy
The EQ response displayed in the graphical output following calibration does not appear entirely flat.
EQ adjustments made using the Manual MCACC setup on page 39 do not appear to change the graphical output.
Lower frequency response curves do not seem to have been calibrated for SMALL speakers.
Graphical output data seems to have disappeared.
• There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when selecting ALL CH ADJUST in the Auto MCACC Setup) due to adjustments made to compensate for room characteristics to achieve optimal sound.
• Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when there is little or no adjustment needed.
• The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and after measurements.
• Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis may not display these adjustments in the graphical output. However, these adjustments are taken this into account by the filters dedicated to overall system calibration.
• Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer channel) will not change for speakers that have been specified as SMALL in the configuration, or do not output these frequencies.
• Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers’ low frequency limitations, no measurable sound is output for display.
• If the power is switched off, the measurement data for graphical output to a PC is cleared.
Display
Symptom Remedy
The display is dark or off. • Press DIMMER on the remote control repeatedly to select a different brightness.
After making an adjustment the display goes off.
You can’t get DIGITAL to display when using the SIGNAL SELECT button.
The Dolby/DTS indicator doesn’t light when playing Dolby/DTS software.
When playing a DVD-Audio disc, the DVD player display shows 96 kHz. However, the receiver’s display does not.
• Press DIMMER on the remote control repeatedly to select a different brightness.
• Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are assigned correctly (see The Input Setup menu on page 67).
• If the multichannel analog inputs are selected, select a different input source.
• These indicators do dot light if playback is paused.
• Check the playback (especially the digital output) settings of the source component.
• This is not a malfunction. 96 kHz audio from DVD-Audio discs is only output from the analog outputs of the DVD player. This receiver cannot show the playback sample rate when using the analog inputs.
86
En
Page 87
Additional information
Symptom Remedy
During playback of a DTS 96/24 source, the display doesn’t show 96 kHz.
When playing Dolby Digital or DTS sources, the receiver’s format indicators do not light.
When playing certain discs, none of the receiver’s format indicators light.
When playing a disc with the listening mode set to Auto Surround, the 2 PL II or Neo:6 indicator lights on the receiver.
During playback of a Surround EX or DTS-ES so urce on th e SBch AUTO setting, the EX and ES indicators don’t light, or the signal is not properly processed.
During playback of DVD-Audio, the display shows PCM.
• Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 31).
• Check that the player is connected using a digital connection.
• Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 31).
• Check that the player isn’t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are converted to PCM.
• Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby Digital or DTS is selected.
• The disc may not contain 5.1/6.1 channel material. Check the disc packaging for more on what audio tracks are recorded on the disc.
• Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 31).
• If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing (including Dolby Surround encoded), then this is not a malfunction. Check the disc packaging for details about the audio tracks available.
•The source may be Dolby Surround EX/DTS-ES software, but it has no flag to indicate it is 6.1 compatible. Set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 32) then switch to the THX Surround EX or Standard EX listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 28).
•This will occur when playing DVD-Audio material over the HDMI connection. This is not a malfunction.
13
Remote control
Symptom Remedy
Cannot be remote controlled. • Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see Loading the batteries on page 6).
Other components can’t be operated with the system remote.
The SR cable is connected, but the connected components can’t be operated with the remote.
• Be sure to operate within 7 m (23 feet) and a 30º angle of the remote sensor on the front panel (see Operating range of remote control unit on page 24).
• Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote control.
• Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the remote sensor.
• Check the connections of the CONTROL IN jack (see Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s sensor on page 82).
• If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared. Re-enter the preset codes.
• The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering preset codes.
• Reinsert the SR cable, making sure it’s connected to the right jack (see Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display on page 62).
• Make sure that there is an analog or HDMI connection between the units. This is necessary for the SR feature to work.
• Check that the other component is made by Pioneer. The SR feature only works with Pioneer equipment.
87
En
Page 88
13
Additional information
HDMI
Symptom Remedy
The HDMI indicator blinks continuously.
No picture or sound. • This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are connecting are also HDCP-
No picture. • Try changing the Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 72).
No sound, or sound suddenly ceases.
Noisy or distorted picture. • Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the video
HDCP ERROR shows in the display.
• Check all the points below.
compatible. If they are not, please connect them using the component, S-video or composite video jacks.
• Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not work with this receiver (even if it is HDCP-compatible). In this case, connect using the component, S-video or composite video jacks between source and receiver.
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.
• If video images do not appear on your TV or plasma display, try adjusting the resolution, DeepColor or other setting for your component.
• If ‘NOT SUPPORT’ appears in the receiver’s display, try adjusting the resolution, DeepColor or other setting for your component.
• While analog video signals are being output over HDMI, use a separate connection for audio output.
• When this receiver reproduces MULTI CH IN audio sources with the HDMI setting set to THROUGH, you cannot hear audio output from all channels. In this case, make a digital or analog audio connection.
• To output signals in DeepColor, use an HDMI cable (compliant with Version 1.3a, Category 2) to connect this receiver to a component or TV with the DeepColor feature.
• Check that the HDMI AV setting is set to AMP/THROUGH.
• If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio.
• If analog video is being output over HDMI, please use a separate connection for the audio.
• Check the audio output settings of the source component.
quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and display device using the same type of connection (component, S-video or composite), then start playback again.
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.
• Check whether or not the connected component is compatible with HDCP. If it is not compatible with HDCP, reconnect the source device using a different type of connection (component, S-video or composite). Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video, this is not a malfunction.
88
En
iPod messages
Symptom Cause Action
Error I1 There is a problem with the signal path from the
iPod to the receiver.
Error I2 The software version being used with the iPod
needs to be updated.
No Music Track There are no playable songs currently stored in
the iPod.
Switch off the receiver and reconnect the iPod to the receiver. If this doesn’t seem to work, try resetting your iPod.
Update the software being used with the iPod (please use the latest iPod software versions later than the iPod updater 2004­10-20).
Input some music files compatible with iPod playback.
Page 89
Additional information
XM radio messages
Symptom Cause Action
Check Antenna The XM antenna is not connected. Check that the XM antenna cable is attached securely.
Check Tuner The XM Mini-Tuner is not properly connected. Check whether the XM Mini-Tuner is firmly connected to the
XM Power Error A short-circuit occurring in the antenna or
surrounding antenna cable.
Updating The radio is being updated with the latest
encryption code.
No Signal The XM signal is too weak at the current location. n/a
Loading The receiver is acquiring audio or program
information.
Off Air The channel currently selected has stopped
broadcasting.
CH– – – You have selected a channel that does not exist,
or that you have not subscribed to.
– – – – – – – – There is no artist name/feature, song/program
title, or channel category associated with the channel at this time.
receiver.
Make sure that there is nothing unusual with the antenna or antenna cable. Switch the power off then back on again.
Wait until the encryption code has been updated. Channels 00 and 01 should function normally.
Wait until the information has been received.
Select another channel.
The receiver will automatically switch to channel 001 (or the last selected channel).
No action needed.
13
SIRIUS radio messages
Symptom Cause Action
Antenna Error Antenna is not properly connected. Check that the antenna cable is attached securely.
Check Sirius Tuner SIRIUS Connect tuner is not properly connected. Check that the 8 pin mini DIN cable and AC Adapter are
Acquiring Signal The SIRIUS signal is too weak at the current
location.
Subscription Updating Unit is updating subscription. Wait until the encryption code has been updated.
Updating Channels Unit is updating channels. Wait until the encryption code has been updated.
Invalid Channel Selected channel is not available/does not exist. Select another channel.
Note
• If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
attached securely.
n/a
89
En
Page 90
13
90
En
Additional information
Surround sound formats
Below is a brief description of the main surround sound formats you’ll find on DVDs, satellite, cable and terrestrial broadcasts, and video cassettes.
Dolby
The Dolby technologies are explained below. See www.dolby.com for more detailed information.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding system widely used in cinemas, and in the home for DVD and digital broadcast soundtracks. It can deliver up to six discrete audio channels, comprising five full range channels and a special LFE (low frequency effects) channel used mainly for deep, rumbling sound effects; hence the term “5.1-channel” Dolby Digital.
In addition to the format features above, Dolby Digital decoders offer downmixing for compatibility with mono, stereo and Dolby Pro Logic audio from a number of bit rates and channels. Another feature, called Dialog Normalization, attenuates programs based on the average level of dialog in a program relative to its peak level (also known as Dialnorm) in order to achieve uniform playback level.
Dolby Digital Surround EX
Dolby Digital Surround EX (the EX stands for EXtended) is an extension of Dolby Digital encoding whereby a surround back channel is matrixed into the surround left/right channels for 6.1 channel playback. This allows for compatibility with Dolby Digital 5.1 channel decoding, as well as for decoding using Dolby Digital EX.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx and Dolby Surround
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby Pro Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) decoding system. Using the innovative “steering logic” circuit, this system extracts surround sound from sources as follows:
Dolby Pro Logic – 4.1 channel sound (mono surround) from any stereo source
Dolby Pro Logic II – 5.1 channel sound (stereo surround) from any stereo source
Dolby Pro Logic IIx – 6.1 or 7.1 channel sound (stereo surround and surround back) from two channel or
5.1(and 6.1) channel sources
With two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is generated by bass management in the receiver.
Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack, which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for enhanced surround listening with greater sound detail.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is the next-generation audio technology for all high-definition programming and media. It combines the efficiency to meet future broadcast demands with the power and flexibility to realize the full audio potential expected in the upcoming high-definition era. Built on Dolby Digital, the multi-channel audio standard for DVD and HD broadcasts worldwide, Dolby Digital Plus was designed for the next-generation A/V receivers but remains fully compatible with all current A/V receivers.
Dolby Digital Plus delivers multi-channel audio programs of up to 7.1 channels (*) and supports multiple programs in a single encoded bitstream with the maximum bit rate potential of up to 6 Mbps and the maximum bit rate performance of up to 3 Mbps on HD DVD and 1.7 Mbps on Blu-ray Disc, and it outputs Dolby Digital bitstreams for playback on existing Dolby Digital systems. Dolby Digital Plus can accurately reproduce the sound originally intended by directors and producers.
It also features multi-channel sound with discrete channel output, interactive mixing and streaming capability in advanced systems. Supported by High-Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a single-cable digital connection is possible for high-definition audio and video.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is the next-generation lossless encoding technology developed for high-definition optical discs in the upcoming era. Dolby TrueHD delivers tantalizing sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, unlocking the true high-definition entertainment experience on high-definition optical discs in the next generation. When coupled with high-definition video, Dolby TrueHD offers an unprecedented home theater experience with stunning sound and high­definition picture.
It supports bit rates of up to 18 Mbps and records up to 8 full­range channels (*) individually with 24-bit/96 kHz audio. It also features extensive metadata including dialogue normalization and dynamic range control. Supported by High-Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a single-cable digital connection is possible for high-definition audio and video.
HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc standards currently limit their maximum number of audio channels to eight, whereas Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD support more than eight audio channels.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Page 91
Additional information
13
DTS
The DTS technologies are explained below. See www.dtstech.com for more detailed information.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio coding system from DTS Inc. now widely used for DVD-Video, DVD-Audio,
5.1 music discs, digital broadcasts, and video games. It can deliver up to six discrete audio channels, comprising five full range channels, including an LFE channel. Higher sound quality is achieved through the use of a low compression rate, and high rates of transmittance during playback.
DTS-ES
DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) is a decoder that is capable of decoding both DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources. DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 gives ‘true’ 6.1 channel sound, with a completely separate (discrete) surround back channel. DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 has a surround back channel matrixed into the surround left/right channels. Both sources are also compatible with a conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder.
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 can generate 6.1 channel surround sound from any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV) and from 5.1 channel sources. It uses both the channel information already encoded into the source, as well as its own processing to determine channel localization (with two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is generated by bass management in the receiver). Two modes (Cinema and Music) are available using DTS Neo:6 with two channel sources.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is an extension of the original DTS Digital Surround which offers high quality 96 kHz/24-bit audio using a DTS 96/24 decoder. This format is also fully backward compatible with all existing decoders. This means that DVD players can play this software using a conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder.
DTS-EXPRESS
DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology supporting up to 5.1 channels with fixed data transfer rates. This format is incorporated with sub audio on HD DVD and secondary audio on Blu-ray Disc while boasting the potential applicability to upcoming broadcasts and memory audio contents.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is a technology that delivers master audio sources recorded in a professional studio to listeners without any loss of data, preserving audio quality. DTS-HD Master Audio adopts variable data transfer rates, facilitating data transfer to the maximum rate of 24.5 Mbps in the Blu-ray disc format, 18.0 Mbps in the HD-DVD format, which by far exceeds that of a standard DVD. These high data
transfer rates enable lossless transmission of 96 kHz/24-bit
7.1-channel audio sources without deteriorating the quality of the original sound. DTS-HD Master Audio is an irreplaceable technology that can reproduce sound faithfully as intended by the creator of music or movies.
“DTS” is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. and “DTS-HD Master Audio” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional (WMA9 Pro) is a discrete surround format developed by Microsoft Corporation.
WMA9 Pro can support up to 5.1/7.1 channel playback with sampling rates up to 24-bit/96 kHz. Using the unique WMA compression techniques, WMA9 Pro can deliver multichannel music and soundtracks over high-speed internet networks at low bit rates with minimal audio degradation. Playback may be enjoyed with the Windows Media Player 9 Series (or above) and other third-party media players on a personal computer, or with an AV amplifier with on-board WMA9 Pro decoding.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
About THX
The THX technologies are explained below. See www.thx.com for more detailed information.
• THX Cinema processing
THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by the world-renowned film production company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’ personal desire to make your experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your home theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director intended. Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theatres with similar equipment and conditions. This same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not changed for playback in a small home theatre environment. THX engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate the sound from the movie theatre environment into the home, correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the THX indicator is on, THX features are automatically added in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX).
91
En
Page 92
13
Additional information
• Re-Equalization
The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie theaters using very different professional equipment. Re-Equalization restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a small home environment.
• Timbre Matching
The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the direction from which the sound is coming. In a movie theatre, there is an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all around you. In a home theatre, you use only two speakers located to the side of your head. The Timbre Matching feature filters the information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless panning between the front and surround speakers.
• Adaptive Decorrelation
In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers help create an enveloping surround sound experience, but in a home theatre there are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive Decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel’s time and phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This expands the listening position and creates—with only two speakers— the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre.
• THX Select2
Before any home theatre component can be THX Select2 certified, it must incorporate all the features above and also pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product feature the THX Select2 logo, which is your guarantee that the Home Theatre products you purchase will give you superb performance for many years to come. THX Select2 requirements cover every aspect of the product including pre-amplifier and power amplifier performance and operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the digital and analog domain.
• THX Surround EX
THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd. In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization than ever before. Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when released into the home consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com. Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this new technology in the home. This product may also engage the “THX Surround EX” mode during the playback of 5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded. In such case the information delivered to the Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the tastes of the individual listener.
• Advanced Speaker Array (ASA)
ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal surround sound experience. When you set up your home theater system using all eight speaker outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround Right, Surround Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and Subwoofer) placing the two Surround Back speakers close together facing the front of the room as shown in the diagram will provide the largest sweet spot. If for practical reasons you have to place the Surround Back speakers apart, you will need to go THX Audio Set-up screen and choose the setting that most closely corresponds to the speaker spacing, which will re-optimize the surround sound-field. ASA is used in three new modes; THX Select2 Cinema, THX MusicMode and THX Games Mode.
• THX Select2 Cinema mode
THX Select2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all eight speakers giving you the best possible movie watching experience. In this mode, ASA processing blends the side surround speakers and back surround speakers providing the optimal mix of ambient and directional surround sounds. DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected in Select2 Cinema mode if the appropriate flag has been encoded. Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital flag that allows automatic switching. If you know that the movie that you are watching is encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select the THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise THX Select2 Cinema mode will apply ASA processing to provide optimum replay.
•THX MusicMode
For the replay of multi-channel music the THX MusicMode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources suc h as DTS, Dolby Digital and DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable rear soundstage.
• THX Games Mode
For the replay of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX Games Mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded game sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital. This accurately places all game audio surround information, providing a full 360 degree playback environment. THX Games Mode is unique as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround field.
THX and the THX logo are trademarks of THX Ltd. which may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
About Neural Surround
Neural Surround represents the latest advancement in surround technology and has been adopted by XM Satellite Radio, FM Radio and (VSX-94TXH only) Neural Music Direct for broadcasts of surround recordings and live events. Neural Surround employs psychoacoustic frequency domain processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound stage with superior localization of surround elements. System playback is scalable from stereo up to state-of-the-art multichannel surround.
Neural Surround is a trademark owned by Neural Audio Corporation, THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
92
En
Page 93
Additional information
Listening modes with different input signal formats
The following charts outline the listening modes available with different input signal formats, depending on the surround back channel processing and decoding method you have selected.
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats
SBch Processing Input signal format Standard THX Auto Surround
SBch
Processing
ON/AUTO
(Automatically
selects 6.1/7.1
channel decoding)
SBch
Processing
d
OFF
(Maximum 5.1
channel playback)
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
(except for 176.4 kHz/
192 kHz)
WMA9 Pro
(44.1 kHz/48 kHz)
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD
DTS-EXPRESS
WMA9 Pro
(88.2 kHz/96 kHz)
Dolby TrueHD
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
Dolby Digital Surround 2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
DTS Surround As above As above Neo:6 CINEMA
SACD As above
XM Radio 2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
Other stereo sources 2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
(except for 176.4 kHz/
192 kHz)
WMA9 Pro
(44.1 kHz/48 kHz)
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD
DTS-EXPRESS
WMA9 Pro
(88.2 kHz/96 kHz)
Dolby TrueHD
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE 2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx GAME
2 PRO LOGIC
Stereo playback THX CINEMA As above
As above
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx GAME
2 PRO LOGIC
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx GAME
2 PRO LOGIC
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
XM HD Surround
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx GAME
2 PRO LOGIC
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
Neural THX
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC 2 Pro Logic ll GAME
2 PRO LOGIC
Stereo playback THX CINEMA As above
As above
a
a
a
c
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE+THX
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
THX GAMES MODE
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE+THX
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
THX GAMES MODE
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE+THX
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
THX GAMES MODE
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE+THX
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
THX GAMES MODE
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE+THX
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
Stereo playback
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
Stereo playback
XM HD Surround
Stereo playback
Stereo playback
As above
As above
13
93
En
Page 94
13
Additional information
SBch Processing Input signal format Standard THX Auto Surround
SBch
Processing
d
OFF
(Maximum 5.1
channel playback)
Dolby Digital Surround 2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll GAME
2 PRO LOGIC
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
DTS Surround As above As above Neo:6 CINEMA
SACD As above
XM Radio 2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
Other stereo sources 2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll GAME
2 PRO LOGIC
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
XM HD Surround
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll GAME
2 PRO LOGIC
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
Neural THX
a.2 Pro Logic has a maximum of 5.1 channel playback. b.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected. c.Available only with the FM or HOME MEDIA GALLERY input. d.Automatically selected if no surround back speakers are connected.
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE+THX
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE+THX
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE+THX
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
a
c
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
Stereo playback
XM HD Surround
Stereo playback
Multichannel signal formats
SBch Processing Input signal format Standard THX Auto Surround
SBch
Processing
ON
(7.1 channel
decoding used for
all sources)
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
DTS-HD
DTS-HD Master Audio
WMA9 Pro (44.1 kHz/48 kHz)
PCM
(6.1/7.1 channel)
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
(except for 176.4 kHz/
192 kHz)
(5.1 channel)
Dolby TrueHD
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
(5.1 channel)
DTS-EXPRESS
DTS-HD
DTS-HD Master Audio
WMA9 Pro
(88.2 kHz/96 kHz)
(5.1 channel)
Dolby Digital EX
(6.1 channel flagged)
Straight decoding THX CINEMA Straight decoding
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
a
THX SURROUND EX
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE+THX
THX Select2 CINEMA
THX MUSICMODE
THX GAMES MODE
Straight decoding
Straight decoding THX CINEMA
THX Select2 CINEMA
THX MUSICMODE
THX GAMES MODE
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
a
THX SURROUND EX
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX
THX Select2 CINEMA
THX MUSICMODE
THX GAMES MODE
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
Dolby Digital EX
a
Straight decoding
Straight decoding
Dolby Digital EX
a
2 Pro Logic llx
MOVIE
2 Pro Logic IIx
MOVIE
a
a
94
En
Page 95
Additional information
SBch Processing Input signal format Standard THX Auto Surround
SBch
Processing
ON
(7.1 channel
decoding used for
all sources)
SBch
Processing
AUTO
(Automatically selects 6.1/7.1
channel
decoding)
sources/6.1 channel flagged)
SBch
Processing
c
OFF
(Maximum 5.1
channel
playback)
a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.
b.ES processing is not carried out for certain DTS-ES signals input from HDMI.
c.Automatically selected if no surround back speakers are connected.
DTS-ESb
(6.1 channel sources/
6.1 channel flagged)
DTS and DTS 96/24
(5.1 channel encoding)
Dolby Digital
WMA9 Pro
(44.1 kHz/48 kHz)
PCM
(5.1 channel encoding)
SACD
(5.1 channel encoding)
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
DTS-HD
DTS-HD Master Audio
WMA9 Pro
PCM
(6.1/7.1 channel)
Dolby TrueHD
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
(5.1 channel)
Dolby Digital EX
(6.1 channel flagged)
DTS-ESb (6.1 channel
Other 5.1 channel sources
(5.1 channel encoding)
SACD
(5.1 channel encoding)
Dolby TrueHD
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
SACD
(5.1 channel)
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel
sources
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
a
MOVIE
DTS+Neo:6
a
MOVIE
a
a
DTS-ES+THX (Matrix/Discrete)
DTS
+
2 Pro Logic llx
MOVIE
+
THX
a
THX Select2 CINEMA
THX MUSICMODE
THX GAMES MODE
DTS+Neo:6+THX
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx
MOVIE+THX
a
THX Select2 CINEMA
THX MUSICMODE
THX GAMES MODE
THX SURROUND EX
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE+THX
THX Select2 CINEMA
THX MUSICMODE
THX GAMES MODE
THX MUSICMODE
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
DTS+Neo:6
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx
MOVIE
MOVIE
a
a
Straight decoding THX CINEMA Straight decoding
Straight decoding
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
a
THX SURROUND EX Dolby Digital EX
Straight decoding
2 Pro Logic llx
MOVIE
a
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete) DTS-ES+THX (Matrix/Discrete) DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
Straight decoding
(Maximum 5.1 channel
playback)
Straight decoding
(Maximum 5.1 channel
playback)
Straight decoding
THX Select2 CINEMA
(Maximum 5.1 channel
THX CINEMA playback with only
one surround back speaker)
THX MUSICMODE
a
Straight decoding
(Maximum 5.1 channel
playback)
Straight decoding
(Maximum 5.1 channel
playback)
Straight decoding
As above THX CINEMA As above
13
95
En
Page 96
13
Additional information
Stream direct with different input signal formats
The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the Stream Direct mode (see Using Stream Direct on page 30) you have selected.
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats
Surround Back speaker(s) Input signal format DIRECT PURE DIRECT
Connected
(Maximum 7.1 channel playback)
Not connected
(Maximum 5.1 channel playback)
a.SACD DIRECT (VSX-94TXH) or Straight decoding (VSX-92TXH)
Dolby Digital Surround 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
DTS Surround Neo:6 CINEMA Neo:6 CINEMA
Other stereo sources Stereo playback Stereo playback
Analog sources As above ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)
PCM sources As above PCM DIRECT (stereo)
DVD-A sources As above PCM DIRECT (stereo)
SACD sources As above
Dolby Digital Surround 2 Pro Logic II MOVIE 2 Pro Logic II MOVIE
DTS Surround Neo:6 CINEMA Neo:6 CINEMA
Other stereo sources Stereo playback Stereo playback
Analog sources As above ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)
PCM sources As above PCM DIRECT (stereo)
DVD-A sources As above PCM DIRECT (stereo)
SACD sources
As above
SACD DIRECT (stereo)
SACD DIRECT (stereo)
a
a
Multichannel signal formats
Surround Back speaker(s) Input signal format
Connected
(Maximum 7.1 channel playback)l
Not connected
(Maximum 5.1 channel playback)
a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected. b.SACD DIRECT (VSX-94TXH) or Straight decoding (VSX-92TXH)
Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel flagged) Dolby Digital EX
DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel flagged) DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete) DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
DVD-A sources/Muti-ch PCM Straight decoding PCM DIRECT
SACD sources
(5.1 channel encoding)
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources As above Straight decoding
DVD-A sources/Muti-ch PCM Straight decoding PCM DIRECT
SACD sources
(5.1 channel encoding)
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources As above Straight decoding
DIRECT PURE DIRECT
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
As above
As above
a
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
Dolby Digital EX
SACD DIRECT
SACD DIRECT
a
b
b
96
En
Page 97
Additional information
Specifications
Amplifier section
Continuous average power output of 140 (or 130) watts* per channel, min., at 8 ohms, from 20 Hz to 20 000 Hz with no more than 0.09 %** total harmonic distortion (front).
Continuous Power Output (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 , 0.09 %)
Front. . . . .130 W + 130 W (92TXH), 140 W + 140 W (94TXH)
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 W (92TXH), 140 W (94TXH)
Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 W + 130 W (92TXH)
140 W + 140 W (94TXH)
Surround back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 W + 130 W (92TXH)
140 W + 140 W (94TXH)
Continuous Power Output (1 kHz, 6 , 1.0 %)
Front. . . . .160 W + 160 W (92TXH), 180 W + 180 W (94TXH)
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 W (92TXH), 180 W (94TXH)
Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 W + 160 W (92TXH)
180 W + 180 W (94TXH)
Surround back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 W + 160 W (92TXH)
180 W + 180 W (94TXH)
Total harmonic distortion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.05 %
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 120 W, 8 ) (92TXH) (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 130 W, 8 ) (94TXH)
* Measured pursuant to the Federal Trade Commission’s Trade Regulation rule on Power Output Claims for Amplifiers ** Measured by Audio Spectrum Analyzer
Audio Section
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)
LINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 mV/47 k
Frequency Response (LINE). . . . . . .5 Hz to 100 000 Hz dB
Output (Level/Impedance)
REC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 mV/2.2 k
Tone Control
BASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ± 6 dB (100 Hz)
TREBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ± 6 dB (10 kHz)
LOUDNESS. . . . . . . . . . +4 dB / +2 dB (100 Hz / 10 kHz)
(at volume position –40 dB)
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, short circuited, A network)
LINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio [EIA, at 1 W (1 kHz)]
LINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 dB
Composite Video / S-Video Section
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p/75
Output (Level/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p/75
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 dB
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Hz to 10 MHz
Component Video Section
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p/75
Output (Level/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p/75
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 dB
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Hz to 100 MHz
FM Tuner Section
Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz
Usable Sensitivity . . . . . . .Mono: 13.2 dBf, IHF (1.3 µV/75 Ω)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mono: 20.2 dBf
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . Mono: 73 dB (at 85 dBf)
Distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stereo: 0.5 % (1 kHz)
Alternate Channel Selectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 dB (400 kHz)
Stereo Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 dB (1 kHz)
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Hz to 15 kHz ± 1 dB
Antenna Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 unbalanced
Stereo: 38.6 dBf
Stereo: 70 dB (at 85 dBf)
AM Tuner Section
Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 kHz to 1700 kHz
Sensitivity (IHF, Loop antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 µV/m
Selectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 dB
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop antenna
Miscellaneous
Power Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AC 120 V, 60 Hz
Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 W, 690 VA
In standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.55 W (HDMI Control OFF)
AC Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (switched) 100 W MAX.
Dimensions . . . . . . 420 (W) mm x 187 (H) mm x 459 (D) mm
Weight (without package). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17.0 kg (37.5 lb)
9
(16
/16 (W) in. x 7 3/8 (H) in. x 18 1/16 (D) in.)
0.75 W (HDMI Control ON)
Furnished Parts
Setup microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) . . . . . . . . . 1
AA/IEC R6P dry cell batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Remote control unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
iPod control cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
These operating instructions Operating instructions for HOME MEDIA GALLERY (VSX-94TXH only)
Note
• Specifications and the design are subject to possible modifications without notice, due to improvements.
Cleaning the unit
• Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off dust and dirt.
• When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft cloth dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six times with water, and wrung out well, and then wipe again with a dry cloth. Do not use furniture wax or cleansers.
• Never use thinners, benzine, insecticide sprays or other chemicals on or near this unit, since these will corrode the surface.
13
97
En
Page 98
13
Additional information
Our philosophy
Pioneer is dedicated to making your home theater listening experience as close as possible to the vision of the moviemakers and mastering engineer when they created the original soundtrack. We do this by focusing on three important steps:
1 Achieving the highest possible sound quality
2 Allowing for customized acoustic calibration according to any listening area
3 Fine-tuning the receiver with the help of world­class studio engineers
Features
• Easy setup using Advanced MCACC
The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate surround sound setup, which includes the advanced features of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ. This innovative technology measures the reverb characteristics of your listening area, allowing you to customize your system calibration with the help of a graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or using a computer. With the additional benefits of numerous MCACC preset memories, standing wave control and microphone measurements from a series of reference points, your home theater experience can be truly customized for optimal surround sound.
• HOME MEDIA GALLERY
This receiver can play back contents stored on your computer when your computer is connected to the LAN terminal of this receiver. Also, you can listen to the Internet radio stations.
• Dolby Digital and DTS decoding, including Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-EXPRESS and DTS-HD Master Audio
Dolby Digital and DTS decoding brings theater sound right into your home with up to six channels of surround sound, including a special LFE (Low Frequency Effects) channel for deep, realistic sound effects.
The built-in Dolby Pro Logic IIx and DTS Neo:6 decoders not only provide full surround sound decoding for Dolby Surround sources, but will also generate convincing surround sound for any stereo source.
Also, with the addition of a surround back speaker, you can take advantage of the built-in Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES decoders for six-channel surround sound.
Furthermore, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD, which are designed for the next-generation high­definition media such as Blu-ray Disc and HD DVD, support up to 7.1 channels and 8 channels respectively.
1
(VSX-94TXH only)
DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology supporting up to 5.1 channels, with fixed data transfer rates ranging from 24 kbps to 256 kbps (this encoding is available only when signals are delivered to this receiver as primary audio).
DTS-HD Master Audio delivers audio signals to listeners without any loss of data with its high transfer rates.
• Phase Control
The Phase Control feature corrects the phase distortion as well as group delay for LFE (Low-Frequency Effects) audio signals during multichannel playback.
• Full Band Phase Control
The Full Band Phase Control feature analyzes the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers connected and corrects the phase distortion to the flattened frequency-phase characteristics. This correction minimizes the group delay of the middle- and low-frequency ranges against the high-frequency range and improves the frequency-phase characteristics across all ranges. Furthermore, the enhanced frequency­phase characteristics between channels ensure better surround sound integration.
• HDMI and digital video conversion
This receiver is compatible with the HDMI digital video format (HDMI Version 1.3), providing you with high­definition digital video/audio via a single cable. High-quality sound formats such as DTS-HD and Dolby TrueHD are supported while this receiver is also compatible with the DeepColor feature. You can operate this receiver in synchronization with your Pioneer component that supports the HDMI Control function by connecting your component to this receiver via HDMI. Also, the built-in digital video converter of this receiver makes both de-interlacing and up-scaling possible, and analog video signals being input are converted and output as digital video signals at the HDMI terminal.
•DCDi
Faroudja’s DCDi Processing is selectable and ensures that images are smooth and natural, without staircasing or jaggies.
• iPod, XM and SIRIUS Ready
With the new iPod, XM and SIRIUS Radio terminals, you’ll be up and running in no time. This receiver’s enhanced compatibility makes XM HD Surround playback as well as on-screen control of your iPod, XM and SIRIUS Radio an added possibility.
1
With the cooperation of AIR Studios, this receiver has been designated
AIR Studios Monitor Reference:
98
En
Page 99
Additional information
Selecting fine audio equipment such as the unit you’ve just purchased is only the start of your musical enjoyment. Now it’s time to consider how you can maximize the fun and excitement your equipment offers. This manufacturer and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion-and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing.
Sound can be deceiving. Over time your hearing “comfort level” adapts to higher volumes of sound. So what sounds “normal” can actually be loud and harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by setting your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your hearing adapts.
To establish a safe level:
• Start your volume control at a low setting.
• Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it
comfortably and clearly, and without distortion.
Once you have established a comfortable sound level:
• Set the dial and leave it there.
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
Used wisely, your new sound equipment will provide a lifetime of fun and enjoyment. Since hearing damage from loud noise is often undetectable until it is too late, this manufacturer and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you avoid prolonged exposure to excessive noise. This list of sound levels is included for your protection.
Decibel Level Example
30 Quiet library, soft whispers
Living room, refrigerator, bedroom away from traffic
40 50 Light traffic, normal conversation, quiet office 60 Air conditioner at 20 feet, sewing machine 70 Vacuum cleaner, hair dryer, noisy restaurant
Average city traffic, garbage disposals, alarm clock
80 at two feet.
THE FOLLOWING NOISES CAN BE DANGEROUS UNDER CONSTANT EXPOSURE
Subway, motorcycle, truck traffic, lawn mower
90 100 Garbage truck, chain saw, pneumatic drill 120 Rock band concert in front of speakers, thunderclap 140 Gunshot blast, jet plane 180 Rocket launching pad
Information courtesy of the Deafness Research Foundation.
13
Taking a minute to do this now will help to prevent hearing damage or loss in the future. After all, we want you listening for a lifetime.
S001_En
99
En
Page 100
Should this product require service in the U.S.A. and you wish to locate the nearest Pioneer Authorized Independent Service Company, or if you wish to purchase replacement parts, operating instructions, service manuals, or accessories, please call the number shown below.
Si ce produit doit être réparé au Canada, veuillez vous adresser à un distributeur autorisé Pioneer du Canada pour obtenir le nom du Centre de Service Autorisé Pioneer le plus près de chez-vous. Vous pouvez aussi contacter le Service à la clientèle de Pioneer:
8 0 0 – 4 2 1 – 1 4 0 4
Please do not ship your product to Pioneer without first calling the Customer Support Division at the above listed number for assistance.
Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc. Customer Support Division P.O. BOX 1760, Long Beach, CA 90801-1760, U.S.A.
For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty sheet included with your product.
Should this product require service in Canada, please contact a Pioneer Canadian Authorized Dealer to locate the nearest Pioneer Authorized Service Company in Canada. Alternatively, please contact the Customer Satisfaction Department at the following address:
Pioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc. Customer Satisfaction Department 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2 1-877-283-5901 905-479-4411
For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty sheet included with your product.
Pioneer Électroniques du Canada, Inc. Service Clientèle 300, Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2 1-877-283-5901 905-479-4411
Pour obtenir des renseignements sur la garantie, veuillez vous reporter au feuillet sur la garantie restreinte qui accompagne le produit.
S018_B_EF
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
K002_B_En
PIONEER, ELITE, SOUND.VISION.SOUL, and the Pioneer, Elite and
sound.vision.soul logos are trademarks of Pioneer Corporation.
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright © 2007 Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
Printed in <ARB7379-A>
Loading...